17TH STREET MARKET CITY of RICHMOND...CITY of RICHMOND 100 N 17TH STREET RICHMOND, VA 23219 Project No. 2.130262.0 17 OCT 2016 Construction Documents | Bid Package Includes Addendum

Project Manual

for

17TH STREET MARKETCITY of RICHMOND

100 N 17TH STREET RICHMOND, VA 23219

Project No. 2.130262.017 OCT 2016

Construction Documents | Bid PackageIncludes Addendum 1

Set No. ______

CITY of RICHMOND – 17TH STREET MARKET 17 OCT 2016 100 N 17TH ST, RICHMOND, VA 23219 BID PACKAGEBASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.150262.0

TABLE OF CONTENTSCopyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 3

SPECIFICATIONS - TABLE OF CONTENTS AUTH PACKAGES

SITE F_E ADD1 GMP

00 10 70 SEALS PAGE

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 SUMMARY 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES 01 22 00 UNIT PRICES 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 42 00 REFERENCES 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 73 00 EXECUTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DMWPV

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

04 01 10 MASONRY CLEANING

DIVISION 05 - METALS

05 12 13ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

DMWPV

05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES



DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12 93 00 SITE FURNISHINGS

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

NOT USED

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

22 11 13 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 13 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 22 47 13 DRINKING FOUNTAINS

DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

NOT USED

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 05 26GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260543UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 26 28 13 FUSES 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 52 19 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING - Inverter Unit 26 56 13 LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS - Catenary 26 56 19 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING

26 56 21HID EXTERIOR LIGHTING –Owner Furnished Contractor Installed

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACT

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

NOT USED



DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

31 10 00 SITE CLEARING 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING 31 23 19 DEWATERING 31 50 00 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 16 DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING

32 14 00 UNIT PAVING

32 91 15SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION)

32 93 00 PLANTS

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

33 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE

APPENDIX A

PROJECT 16C13048, GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT 17TH STREET MARKET

END OF SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 1

CITY of RICHMOND – 17TH STREET MARKET 17 OCT 2016

100 N 17TH ST, RICHMOND, VA 23219 BID PACKAGE

BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.150262.0

Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill

SUMMARY; SECTION 01 10 00 PAGE 1 of 4

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.2. Work covered by Contract Documents.3. Work by Owner.4. Work under separate contracts.5. Purchase contracts.6. Owner-furnished products.7. Access to site.8. Coordination with occupants.9. Work restrictions.10. Specification and Drawing conventions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: 17TH STREET MARKET.

1. Project Location: 100 N 17TH ST, RICHMOND, VA 23219.

B. Owner: CITY of RICHMOND.

1. Owner's Representative:

C. Architect: BASKERVILL; Tim Hamnett, AIA Project Manager.

D. Contractor:

E. Web-Based Project Software: Project software administered by Architect will be used for purposes of managing communication and documents during the construction stage.

1. See Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements for using web-based Project software.






1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. The work of this project consists of construction of a + 45,257 SF Outdoor Plaza. The Renovation is a rework for the existing Farmer’s Market; Type II Construction. The existing Open Air Market used for Mercantile and Assembly does not have an occupancy classification. Exterior work includes but is not limited to New Paving on Roadway and Plaza areas, Site Furniture, Planters and Landscape Areas, Underground Utility Vaults, and support spaces.

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 PURCHASE CONTRACTS

A. General: Owner has negotiated Purchase contracts with suppliers of material and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Owner will assign these Purchase contracts to Contractor. Include costs for purchasing, receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated.

1. Contractor's responsibilities are same as if Contractor had negotiated Purchase contracts, including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final purchasing agreements.

B. Purchase Contracts Information:

1. Product: See Section 00 00 00 Section

a. Purchase Contract Firm and Representative: name and contact.b. Purchase Contract Scope: [Furnishing material] [Material and installation labor].c. Purchase Status: Price negotiated by Owner, to be incorporated into the Contract

Sum by Contractor; see Section 012100 "Allowances" for cash allowance for Purchase contract.

1.6 OWNER-FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections.

B. Owner-Furnished Products:

1. N/A

1.7 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Each Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.






1. Limits: Confine construction operations to:2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and entrances

serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or for storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

1.8 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: N/A

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: N/A

C. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work.

2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy.

3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work.

4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work.

1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: N/A.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: N/A.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: N/A.

E. Restricted Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.

F. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.

G. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site.






1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.

1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

1.11 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

A. <Insert miscellaneous provisions>.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000



ALLOWANCES; SECTION 01 21 00 PAGE 1 of 4

SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

B. Types of allowances include the following:

1. Lump-sum allowances.2. Unit-cost allowances.3. Quantity allowances.4. Contingency allowances.5. Testing and inspecting allowances.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices, including adjustment of quantity allowances when applicable.

2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for field testing by an independent testing agency.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Allowance is a quantity of work or dollar amount established in lieu of additional requirements, used to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.

1.4 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection, or purchase and delivery, of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed by the Owner to avoid delaying the Work.

B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS




A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances in the form specified for Change Orders.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.

C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.

1.7 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.

C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.

1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed.

1.8 UNIT-COST ALLOWANCES





1.9 QUANTITY ALLOWANCES








1.10 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES

A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance.

B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, taxes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs.

C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit.

D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order.

1.11 TESTING AND INSPECTING ALLOWANCES

A. Testing and inspecting allowances include the cost of engaging testing agencies, actual tests and inspections, and reporting results.

B. The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency or costs for retesting if previous tests and inspections result in failure. The cost for incidental labor to assist the testing agency shall be included in the Contract Sum.

C. Costs of testing and inspection services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the allowance.

D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the testing and inspecting allowance to Owner by Change Order.

1.12 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.




1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance.

2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other markups.

3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of Work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances.

4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count.

B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.

1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of Work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.

2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

# Item - Section Cost Description

ALW-1 No Longer Used N/A

ALW-2 32 93 00 PLANTS 2.1 Trees $ 28,000.00 Value includes: Tree Selection, Trees and Delivery

ALW-3CUSTOM CONCRETE STAMPS (LEAF IMPRESSIONS)

$ 3,900.00




UNIT PRICES; SECTION 01 22 00PAGE 1 OF 2

SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.


1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for procedures for using unit prices to adjust quantity allowances.

2. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders.

3. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for field testing by an independent testing agency.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price is an amount incorporated into the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.

B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections.

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.



UNIT PRICES; SECTION 01 22 00PAGE 2 OF 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES

A. Unit Price No.1: Hand Excavation of Cobblestone Pavers:

1. Description: Hand Excavation of Coble-Stone Pavers according to Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition."

2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard

B. Unit Price No. 2: Cutting and patching of concrete slabs-on-grade:

1. Description: Cutting of new or existing concrete slabs-on-grade up to 6 inches (152 mm) thick, removal and excavation as required, and subsequent backfill, compaction, and patching of concrete according to Section 017300 "Execution." not otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.

2. Unit of Measurement: Square feet (Square meters) of concrete removed.

C. Unit Price No. 3: Cleaning of Cobblestones in place:

1. Description: Cleaning of Cobblestones in place, if required after the re-installment of the Cobblestones, according to Section 04 01 10 "Masonry Cleaning".

2. Unit of Measurement: Square feet (Square meters).

# UNIT For Work Added For Work Omitted

U-1 Hand Excavation $___per cu. yd. $___per cu. yd.

U-2Concrete (Cutting and patching of concrete slabs-on-grade.)

$___per cu. yd. $___per cu. yd.

U-3 Cleaning of Cobblestones in place $___per sq. ft. $___per sq. ft.





SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES; SECTION 012500Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 3

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.


1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.2. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable

product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.


A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided in Project Manual.2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation method cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes, such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific





features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.g. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and

addresses as well as names and addresses of architects and owners.h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated.i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,

from ICC-ES.j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed

substitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.





1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction.e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed.







PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION; SECTION 01 31 00Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 10

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures.2. Coordination drawings.3. RFIs.4. Digital project management procedures.5. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BIM: Building Information Modeling.

B. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.


A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.





1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its own operations with operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.2. Preparation of the schedule of values.3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.4. Delivery and processing of submittals.5. Progress meetings.6. Preinstallation conferences.7. Project closeout activities.8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely indicated on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.





1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to coordination drawings in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences.g. Indicate dimensions shown on Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear

to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternative sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling, and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within plenums to accommodate layout of light fixtures and other components indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.

3. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that in general the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make suitable modifications and resubmit.

4. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements:1. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using PDF format.

2. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings.

b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in PDF format.c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of

AIA Document C106.





1.7 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name.2. Project number.3. Date.4. Name of Contractor.5. Name of Architect.6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.7. RFI subject.8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.12. Contractor's signature.13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in PDF format.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow five working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.b. Requests for approval of substitutions.c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents.e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt by Architect of additional information.





3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Use software log that is part of web-based Project software.

1. Project name.2. Name and address of Contractor.3. Name and address of Architect.4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.5. RFI description.6. Date the RFI was submitted.7. Date Architect's response was received.8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as

appropriate.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within five days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1.8 DIGITAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

A. Use of Architect's Digital Data Files: Digital data files of Architect's CAD drawings may be available from Architect for Contractor's use during construction.1. Digital data files may be available for preparing coordination drawings, Shop Drawings, and

Project record Drawings.2. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as

they relate to Contract Drawings. ALL DATA FILES MUST BE FIELD VERIFIED BY THE RECIPIENT.

3. Digital Drawing Software Program: Contract Drawings are available in AutoCAD 2015.4. Contractor or its subcontractors requesting digital data files shall execute a data licensing

agreement in the form of “Baskervill CADD/Electronic File Transfer to Contractor” Data Licensing Agreement and pay the digital data fee of $100 per sheet requested.

5. The following digital data files may be available for each appropriate discipline:a. Floor plans.

b. Reflected ceiling plans.

B. Web-Based Project Software: Use Architect's web-based Project software site for purposes of hosting and managing Project communication and documentation until Final Completion.

1. Web-based Project software site includes, at a minimum, the following features:

a. Compilation of Project data, including Contractor, subcontractors, Architect, architect's consultants, Owner, and other entities involved in Project. Include names of individuals and contact information.

b. Access control for each entity for each workflow process, to determine entity's digital rights to create, modify, view, and print documents.

c. Document workflow planning, allowing customization of workflow between project entities.





d. Creation, logging, tracking, and notification for Project communications required in other Specification Sections, including, but not limited to, RFIs, submittals, Minor Changes in the Work, Construction Change Directives, and Change Orders.

e. Track status of each Project communication in real time, and log time and date when responses are provided.

f. Procedures for handling PDFs or similar file formats, allowing markups by each entity. Provide security features to lock markups against changes once submitted.

g. Processing and tracking of payment applications.h. Processing and tracking of contract modifications.i. Creating and distributing meeting minutes.j. Document management for Drawings, Specifications, and coordination drawings,

including revision control.k. Management of construction progress photographs.l. Mobile device compatibility, including smartphones and tablets.

2. At completion of Project, provide digital archive in format that is readable by common desktop software applications in format acceptable to Architect. Provide data in locked format to prevent further changes.

3. Architect's web-based Project software:a. Newforma, Inc.

C. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect, prepare as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are required,

provide a digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated.

1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times a minimum of 10 working days prior to meeting.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and

agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner, and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments.b. Tentative construction schedule.c. Phasing.





d. Critical work sequencing and long lead items.e. Designation of key personnel and their duties.f. Lines of communications.g. Use of web-based Project software.h. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.i. Procedures for RFIs.j. Procedures for testing and inspecting.k. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.l. Distribution of the Contract Documents.m. Submittal procedures.n. Sustainable design requirements.o. Preparation of Record Documents.p. Use of the premises.q. Work restrictions.r. Working hours.s. Owner's occupancy requirements.t. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.u. Procedures for moisture and mold control.v. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.w. Construction waste management and recycling.x. Parking availability.y. Office, work, and storage areas.z. Equipment deliveries and priorities.aa. First aid.bb. Security.cc. Progress cleaning.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 30 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:

a. Preparation of Record Documents.b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance.c. Procedures for completing and archiving web-based Project software site data

files.d. Submittal of written warranties.e. Requirements for completing sustainable design documentation.f. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.g. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.h. Requirements for demonstration and training.i. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.j. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment.k. Submittal procedures.





l. Coordination of separate contracts.m. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.n. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.o. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

D. Progress and Coordination Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, and Architect, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.2) Sequence of operations.3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts.4) Status of submittals.5) Status of sustainable design documentation.6) Deliveries.7) Off-site fabrication.8) Access.9) Site use.10) Temporary facilities and controls.11) Progress cleaning.12) Quality and work standards.13) Status of correction of deficient items.14) Field observations.15) Status of RFIs.16) Status of Proposal Requests.17) Pending changes.18) Status of Change Orders.19) Pending claims and disputes.20) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.













SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 33 00Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 8

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Submittal schedule requirements.2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit, as an action submittal, a list of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal.



b. Specification Section number and title.c. Submittal Category: Action; informational.d. Name of subcontractor.e. Description of the Work covered.f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.g. Scheduled dates for purchasing.h. Scheduled date of fabrication.i. Scheduled dates for installation.j. Activity or event number.

1.5 SUBMITTAL FORMATS

A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal:

1. Project name.2. Date.3. Name of Architect.4. Name of Construction Manager.5. Name of Contractor.6. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.7. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.8. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. Include Specification Section

number with sequential alphanumeric identifier; and alphanumeric suffix for resubmittals.9. Category and type of submittal.10. Submittal purpose and description.11. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for

each of multiple items.12. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.13. Indication of full or partial submittal.14. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.15. Other necessary identification.16. Remarks.17. Signature of transmitter.

B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet.

D. Submittals for Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals as PDF files, or other format indicated by Project software website.

1. Newforma Project Center

1.6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.



1. Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload to web-based Project software website. Enter required data in web-based software site to fully identify submittal.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified in different Sections so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 days for review of each resubmittal.4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,

Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal.

5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 10 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.

D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision.3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp.

E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.



1.7 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.b. Manufacturer's product specifications.c. Standard color charts.d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.e. Testing by recognized testing agency.f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.g. Notation of coordination requirements.h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring.b. Printed performance curves.c. Operational range diagrams.d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrent with Samples.

B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products.b. Schedules.c. Compliance with specified standards.d. Notation of coordination requirements.e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other materials.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Project name and submittal number.b. Generic description of Sample.c. Product name and name of manufacturer.d. Sample source.e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.



f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload to web-based Project software website. Enter required data in web-based software site to fully identify submittal.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record Sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

D. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.3. Number and name of room or space.4. Location within room or space.

E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

F. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal.

G. Certificates:



1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Provide a notarized signature where indicated.

2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

H. Test and Research Reports:

1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

a. Name of evaluation organization.b. Date of evaluation.c. Time period when report is in effect.d. Product and manufacturers' names.e. Description of product.f. Test procedures and results.g. Limitations of use.



1.8 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

1.9 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's approval for each submittal with indication in web-based Project software. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

1. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have Contractor's review and approval.

1.10 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it.

1. Submittals by Web-Based Project Software: Architect will indicate, on Project software website, the appropriate action.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by Architect without action.








QUALITY REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 40 00 PAGE 1 of 10

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and quality-control requirements for individual work results are specified in their respective Specification Sections. Requirements in individual Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further described means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

D. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site either as freestanding temporary built elements or as part of permanent construction. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface




between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed and tested at testing facility to verify performance characteristics.

2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope constructed on-site as part of permanent construction, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies.

3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes; doors; windows; millwork; casework; specialties; furnishings and equipment; and lighting.

E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

F. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

G. Source Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for example, plant, mill, factory, or shop.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

J. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not include contract administration activities performed by Architect[ or Construction Manager].

1.4 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or requirements are specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for direction before proceeding.




B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups.

1. Include plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction.

2. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.

B. Delegated-Design Services Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility submitted to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:

1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections.

2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.3. Description of test and inspection.4. Identification of applicable standards.5. Identification of test and inspection methods.6. Number of tests and inspections required.7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.8. Requirements for obtaining samples.9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.




F. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified.

G. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's Construction Schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.

1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including Subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. Distinguish source quality-control tests and inspections from field quality-control tests and inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the Statement of Special Inspections.

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.9 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue.2. Project title and number.




3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency.4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.7. Identification of product and Specification Section.8. Complete test or inspection data.9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspection.11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements.12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of technical representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.




D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work.c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens and test assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.




K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups of size indicated.2. Build mockups in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed.4. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers

that will be employed to perform same tasks during the construction at Project.5. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.6. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting corresponding work, fabrication, or

construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

8. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

L. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup according to approved Shop Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups are required in individual Specification Sections, along with supporting materials. Comply with requirements in "Mockups" Paragraph.

1.11 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspection allowances, as authorized by Change Orders.

3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspection will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.




5. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform duties of Contractor.

E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

F. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

G. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work.2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples.4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency.7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project

site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.




I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's Construction Schedule. Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.12 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.

B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified special inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.




4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.





TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS; SECTION 01 50 00 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, security and protection facilities, and temporary erosion and sediment control measures.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities engaged in the Project to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the City’s construction forces, Engineer, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.

C. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.

D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations.

1.4 PERMITS

A. Prior to commencement of work, obtain a copy of the approved Erosion and Sediment Control Plan from the City of Richmond.

B. Apply for the Work in Streets Permit as well as any other applicable permits at the contractor’s expense.

C. Schedule a pre-installation conference on-site with the City representative, engineer, and Erosional Control Inspector prior to the start of construction activities.

1.5 ACTIVE SUBMITTALS

A. Responsible Land Disturber registration information.






A. Site Utilization Plan: Show temporary facilities, temporary utility lines and connections, staging areas, construction site entrances, vehicle circulation, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for commencement of the Work, submit schedule indicating implementation and termination dates of each temporary utility.

C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Show fabrication and installation details, including plans, elevations, details, layouts, typestyles, graphic elements, and message content.

D. Dust- Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Include the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work.2. Waste-handling procedures.3. Other dust-control measures.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the United States Access Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before the City’s acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONSTRUCTION FENCING - MATERIALS

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts. Post spacing to be no great than 8’-0” apart.

B. Intermittent Posts: Number 2 Pine pressure treated 4 by 4 by 10’-0” length fence post; spaced either 16 feet (4.8 m) apart or 24 feet (7.3 m) apart in a random pattern. Posts to be directly behind and attached to Chain-Link Line Post.





C. Fencing Windscreen Privacy Screen: Polyester fabric scrim with grommets for attachment to chain link fence, sized to height of fence, in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

D. Lights: Existing (Farmer’s Market) strand lighting to be salvaged and temporarily installed along lower construction fencing and taller intermittent fence posts.

2.2 EROSION CONTROL PRODUCTS

A. Safety Fence1. A protective fence installed to prevent public access from a construction area complying

with the requirements of the Standard of Specification 3.01 of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.a. A windscreen shall be added to the safety fence in order to protect the Legacy

Vendors from dust and construction debris. Contractor to coordinate with owner regarding material and visual graphics displayed on the screen and where to provide pedestrian traffic vision flaps.

b. Install fence around each work area as denoted by the Drawings.c. Install

B. Straw Bale Barrier1. A temporary barrier consisting of a row of entrenched or anchored straw bales that

minimize the amount of sediment leaving the project area complying with the requirements of the Standard of Specification 3.04 of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.

C. Storm Drain Inlet Protection1. A sediment filter or an excavated impounding area around a storm drain drop inlet or curb

inlet complying with the requirements of Standard of Specification 3.07 of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control handbook.

2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, GENERAL

A. Conservation: Coordinate construction and use of temporary facilities with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as the City’s property.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."





B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

B. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

C. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

D. Construction Fencing:1. Construct construction fencing as indicated on Drawings.2. Install taller 4 by 4 fence posts behind every other or every third chain link line post in a

random pattern.3. Temporarily re-install (existing salvaged Farmer’s Market) Strand Lighting along lower

construction fencing and taller intermittent fence posts.

E. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and

individuals seeking entrance to Project.

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touch up signs so they are legible at all times.

F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

1. Where access to adjacent properties is required in order to affect protection of existing facilities, obtain written permission from adjacent property owner to access property for that purpose.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.





1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

C. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated on the Drawings.

3.5 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL INSTALLATION

A. Install all erosion and sediment control measures per the requirements of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.

B. Protect all points of construction ingress and egress to the site to prevent tracking of mud onto public streets. Provide temporary construction entrances at all points of access to the site.

C. Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Refer to Drawings for fence limits.2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized

personnel. Furnish one set of keys to the City.

D. Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

E. Clear only those areas necessary for installation of the perimeter erosion control measures. The balance of the site shall not be cleared or otherwise disturbed until the perimeter erosion control measures are installed, functional and approved by the City.

F. Follow the construction sequence and install erosion control measures as indicated on the Drawings and as directed by the City.

G. Install additional measures as necessary to prevent sediment from the installed paver system and also from leaving the project site.

H. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures per the requirements of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

I. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project.

J. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

3.6 DUST CONTROL PLAN:

A. Submit dust-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Include the following:1. General Dust Suppression:

a. Water spray/mist, adjust demolition activities, and suspend work under unfavorable conditions (sustained wind speed greater than 20 miles per hour)..

b. Maintain clean and un-littered job site. c. Use temporary dust-control fencing at each phase of work.





d. Designate Individual responsible for Air Monitoring Dust Control Program implement a dust control training program for all Site personnel.

2. Keep paved roads clean or wet down if damaged and cracked and cannot be kept clean. 3. Facility Demolition: Water spray/mist, adjust demolition activities, and suspend work

under unfavorable conditions (sustained wind speed greater than 20 miles per hour). 4. Demolition Debris/Waste Stockpiling: Cover stockpiles during sustained wind greater

than 20 miles per hour and at the end of each day. 5. Demolition Debris/Waste/Salvage Loading, Hauling, and Placement: Use water spray

mist as required.

3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. The City reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."






REFERENCES; SECTION 014200 PAGE 1 of 8

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.






C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com.2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org.3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org.4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;

www.transportation.org.5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org.6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org.7. ABMA - American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com.8. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.abma.com.9. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org.10. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org.11. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org.12. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org.13. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org.14. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org.15. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org.16. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org.17. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org.18. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org.19. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org.20. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org.21. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org.22. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com.23. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org.24. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org.25. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org.26. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).27. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).28. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org.29. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org.30. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See

ASCE).31. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers;

www.ashrae.org.32. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers);

www.asme.org.

http://www.aabc.com/

http://www.aamanet.org/

http://www.aapfco.org/

http://www.transportation.org/

http://www.aatcc.org/

http://www.americanbearings.org/

http://www.abma.com/

http://www.abma.com/

http://www.concrete-pipe.org/

http://www.aeic.org/

http://www.afandpa.org/

http://www.aga.org/

http://www.aham.org/

http://www.ahrinet.org/

http://www.asphaltinstitute.org/

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aisc.org/

http://www.steel.org/

http://www.aitc-glulam.org/

http://www.amca.org/

http://www.ansi.org/

http://www.aosaseed.com/

http://www.apawood.org/

http://www.archprecast.org/

http://www.api.org/

http://www.asphaltroofing.org/

http://www.asce.org/

http://www.ashrae.org/

http://www.asme.org/






33. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org.34. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org.35. ASTM - ASTM International; www.astm.org.36. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org.37. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org.38. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org.39. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada;

www.awmac.com.40. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com.41. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org.42. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org.43. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com.44. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com.45. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org.46. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's

Association); www.bifma.org.47. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org.48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation);

www.bissc.org.49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org.50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca.51. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org.52. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com.53. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org.54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com.55. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org.56. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org.57. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org.58. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org.59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com.60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org.61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org.62. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org.63. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca.64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csa-

international.org.65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org.66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org.67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org.68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA).69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com.70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org.71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA).72. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECIA).73. ECIA - Electronic Components Industry Association; www.eciaonline.org.74. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).75. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com.76. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org.77. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org.78. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA).79. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org.80. FCI - Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org.81. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation);

www.fiba.com.82. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation);

www.fivb.org.83. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com.

http://www.asse.org/

http://www.asse-plumbing.org/

http://www.astm.org/

http://www.atis.org/

http://www.awea.org/

http://www.awinet.org/

http://www.awmac.com/

http://www.awpa.com/

http://www.aws.org/

http://www.awwa.org/

http://www.buildershardware.com/

http://www.gobrick.com/

http://www.bicsi.org/

http://www.bifma.org/

http://www.bissc.org/

http://www.copper.org/

http://www.electricity.ca/

http://www.ce.org/

http://www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com/

http://www.cfsei.org/

http://www.cganet.com/

http://www.cellulose.org/

http://www.cisca.org/

http://www.cispi.org/

http://www.chainlinkinfo.org/

http://www.pbmdf.com/

http://www.carpet-rug.org/

http://www.coolroofs.org/

http://www.crsi.org/

http://www.csa.ca/

http://www.csa-international.org/

http://www.csa-international.org/

http://www.csinet.org/

http://www.cedarbureau.org/

http://www.cti.org/

http://www.dasma.com/

http://www.dhi.org/

http://www.eciaonline.org/

http://www.eima.com/

http://www.ejma.org/

http://www.esda.org/

http://www.evo-world.org/

http://www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org/

http://www.fiba.com/

http://www.fivb.org/

http://www.fmglobal.com/






84. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com.85. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.;

www.floridaroof.com.86. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com.87. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org.88. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org.89. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com.90. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org.91. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org.92. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI).93. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM).94. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org.95. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com.96. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org.97. IAS - International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org.98. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA).99. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC).100. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.101. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net.102. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org.103. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org.104. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; http://www.iec.ch.105. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org.106. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of

North America); www.ies.org.107. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES).108. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org.109. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org.110. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu.111. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com.112. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA);

www.intertek.com.113. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and

Automation Society); www.isa.org.114. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA).115. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid

Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org.116. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org.117. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA).118. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home.119. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org.120. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA).121. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org.122. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com.123. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org.124. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org.125. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org.126. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org.127. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com.128. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com.129. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com.130. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.;

www.mss-hq.org.131. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org.132. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International);

www.nace.org.133. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com.

http://www.fmglobal.com/

http://www.floridaroof.com/

http://www.fluidsealing.com/

http://www.fscus.org/

http://www.gypsum.org/

http://www.glasswebsite.com/

http://www.greenseal.org/

http://www.pumps.org/

http://www.hpva.org/

http://www.hpwhite.com/

http://www.iapsc.org/

http://www.iasonline.org/

http://www.iccsafe.org/

http://www.icea.net/

http://www.icpa-hq.org/

http://www.icri.org/

http://www.iec.ch/

http://www.ieee.org/

http://www.ies.org/

http://www.iest.org/

http://www.igmaonline.org/

http://www.igshpa.okstate.edu/

http://www.iliai.com/

http://www.intertek.com/

http://www.isa.org/

http://www.isfanow.org/

http://www.iso.org/

http://www.itu.int/home

http://www.kcma.org/

http://www.lightning.org/

http://www.mbma.com/

http://www.metalconstruction.org/

http://www.maplefloor.org/

http://www.metalframingmfg.org/

http://www.mhia.org/

http://www.marble-institute.com/

http://www.wmmpa.com/

http://www.paintinfo.com/

http://www.mss-hq.org/

http://www.naamm.org/

http://www.nace.org/

http://www.nadca.com/






134. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org.135. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com.136. NBI - New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildings.org.137. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org.138. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org.139. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org.140. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org.141. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org.142. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org.143. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org.144. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org.145. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org.146. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA).147. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org.148. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com.149. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org.150. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA).151. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org.152. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net.153. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org.154. NSF - NSF International; www.nsf.org.155. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org.156. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org.157. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com.158. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org.159. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org.160. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org.161. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology

Association); www.plasa.org.162. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org.163. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com.164. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com.165. SAE - SAE International; www.sae.org.166. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org.167. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org.168. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org.169. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com.170. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See

ASCE).171. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org.172. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org.173. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org.174. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association;

www.smacna.org.175. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org.176. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org.177. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org.178. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org.179. SRCC - Solar Rating & Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org.180. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com.181. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org.182. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com.183. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com.184. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org.185. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org.186. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tileusa.com.187. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org.

http://www.naima.org/

http://www.nbgqa.com/

http://www.newbuildings.org/

http://www.ncaa.org/

http://www.ncma.org/

http://www.nebb.org/

http://www.necanet.org/

http://www.nelma.org/

http://www.nema.org/

http://www.netaworld.org/

http://www.nfhs.org/

http://www.nfpa.org/

http://www.nfrc.org/

http://www.nhla.com/

http://www.nlga.org/

http://www.nomma.org/

http://www.nrca.net/

http://www.nrmca.org/

http://www.nsf.org/

http://www.nspe.org/

http://www.nssga.org/

http://www.ntma.com/

http://www.nwfa.org/

http://www.pci.org/

http://www.pdionline.org/

http://www.plasa.org/

http://www.boltcouncil.org/

http://www.rfci.com/

http://www.redwoodinspection.com/

http://www.sae.org/

http://www.scte.org/

http://www.sdi.org/

http://www.steeldoor.org/

http://www.sefalabs.com/

http://www.siaonline.org/

http://www.steeljoist.org/

http://www.smainfo.org/

http://www.smacna.org/

http://www.smpte.org/

http://www.sprayfoam.org/

http://www.spib.org/

http://www.spri.org/

http://www.solar-rating.org/

http://www.ssina.com/

http://www.sspc.org/

http://www.steeltank.com/

http://www.steelwindows.com/

http://www.swpa.org/

http://www.tilt-up.org/

http://www.tileusa.com/

http://www.tema.org/






188. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org.

189. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).

190. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org.191. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org.192. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org.193. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org.194. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.195. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org.196. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org.197. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org.198. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org.199. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org.200. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org.201. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org.202. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com.203. WI - Woodwork Institute; www.wicnet.org.204. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com.205. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de.2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org.3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil.2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology;

www.nist.gov.4. DOD - Department of Defense; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov.8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov/fdsys.9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov.11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies

Division; www.eetd.lbl.gov.12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov.14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research

Program; The National Academies; www.trb.org.15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity

Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov.16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov.

http://www.tiaonline.org/

http://www.masonrysociety.org/

http://www.tpinst.org/

http://www.turfgrasssod.org/

http://www.tileroofing.org/

http://www.ul.com/

http://www.uni-bell.org/

http://www.usavolleyball.org/

http://www.usgbc.org/

http://www.usitt.org/

http://www.wastec.org/

http://www.wclib.org/

http://www.wcmanet.org/

http://www.wdma.com/

http://www.wicnet.org/

http://www.wsrca.com/

http://www.wwpa.org/

http://www.din.de/

http://www.iapmo.org/

http://www.iccsafe.org/

http://www.icc-es.org/

http://www.usace.army.mil/

http://www.cpsc.gov/

http://www.nist.gov/

http://www.quicksearch.dla.mil/

http://www.energy.gov/

http://www.epa.gov/

http://www.faa.gov/

http://www.gpo.gov/fdsys

http://www.gsa.gov/

http://www.hud.gov/

http://www.eetd.lbl.gov/

http://www.osha.gov/

http://www.state.gov/

http://www.trb.org/

http://www.ars.usda.gov/

http://www.usda.gov/






17. USDOJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice; www.ojp.usdoj.gov.

18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.org.19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov/fdsys.

2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.

3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS).4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS).5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services;

www.quicksearch.dla.mil.

a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil.b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design

Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb.

6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD).7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov.8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See

USAB).

F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. CBHF; State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic and Appliance Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov.

2. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code; www.calregs.com.

3. CDHS; California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH).4. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal-

iaq.org.5. CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov.6. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov.7. TFS; Texas A&M Forest Service; Sustainable Forestry and Economic Development;

www.txforestservice.tamu.edu.




http://www.ojp.usdoj.gov/

http://www.usp.org/

http://www.usps.com/

http://www.gpo.gov/fdsys



http://www.dsp.dla.mil/

http://www.gsa.gov/

http://www.wbdg.org/ccb

http://www.access-board.gov/

http://www.bearhfti.ca.gov/

http://www.calregs.com/

http://www.cal-iaq.org/

http://www.cal-iaq.org/

http://www.cpuc.ca.gov/

http://www.aqmd.gov/

http://www.txforestservice.tamu.edu/










PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 60 00 PAGE 1 of 6

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved by Architect through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation. In addition to the basis-of-design product description, product attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other special features and requirements for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.

C. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification Section, provide products qualified under the specified product procedure. In the event that a named product or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other requirements of the specifications, select another named product or product from another named manufacturer that does meet the requirements of the specifications. Submit a comparable product request, if applicable.







A. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Architect's Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

B. Identification of Products: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer or product names or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products or equipment that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.

1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or, where required for observation following installation, on a visually accessible surface that is not conspicuous.

2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on a visually accessible but inconspicuous surface. Include information essential for operation, including the following:

a. Name of product and manufacturer.b. Model and serial number.c. Capacity.d. Speed.e. Ratings.

3. See individual identification sections in Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 26 for additional identification requirements.






1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment.5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.






C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

a. Submit additional documentation required by Architect in order to establish equivalency of proposed products. Evaluation of "or equal" product status is by the Architect, whose determination is final.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

a. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: …"

2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

a. Sole manufacturer/source may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: …"

3. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.

a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: …"






4. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, which complies with requirements.

a. Non-limited list of products is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …"

5. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.

a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: …"

6. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, which complies with requirements.

a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …"

7. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

a. For approval of products by unnamed manufacturers, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for substitutions for convenience.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:






1. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant product qualities include attributes such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features and requirements.

2. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.3. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.4. Samples, if requested.

B. Submittal Requirements: Approval by the Architect of Contractor's request for use of comparable product is not intended to satisfy other submittal requirements. Comply with specified submittal requirements.







EXECUTION; SECTION 01 73 00 PAGE 1 of 10

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.2. Field engineering and surveying.3. Installation of the Work.4. Cutting and patching.5. Coordination of Owner-installed products.6. Progress cleaning.7. Starting and adjusting.8. Protection of installed construction.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project

Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, replacing defective work, and final cleaning.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of subsequent work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of subsequent work.


A. Qualification Data: For [and surveyor.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.






2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted.

a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems.

D. Certified Surveys: Submit one PDF copy signed by professional engineer.

E. Final Property Survey: Submit one PDF copy showing the Work performed and record survey data.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection.

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment.b. Fire separation assemblies.c. Air or smoke barriers.d. Fire-suppression systems.e. Plumbing piping systems.f. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.g. Control systems.h. Communication systems.i. Fire-detection and -alarm systems.j. Conveying systems.k. Electrical wiring systems.l. Operating systems of special construction.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance






or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.b. Membranes and flashings.c. Exterior curtain-wall construction.d. Sprayed fire-resistive material.e. Equipment supports.f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with sustainable design requirements.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services; and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.






B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work.2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site.3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain

required dimensions.4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.






6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.

7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Final Property Survey: Engage a professional engineer to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.

1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.

2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and

90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.






F. Tools and Equipment: Where possible, select tools or equipment that minimize production of excessive noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Repair or remove and replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming Work.

1. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for repairing or removing and replacing defective Work.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.






G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations.5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.






B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.






H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

I. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work.

C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.











CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 77 00 PAGE 1 of 6

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.2. Final completion procedures.3. Warranties.4. Final cleaning.5. Repair of the Work.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for additional operation and

maintenance manual requirements.2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data.


A. Product Data: For each type of cleaning agent.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at final completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.






1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records.6. Submit sustainable design submittals not previously submitted.7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions.3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. 6. Advise Owner of changeover in utility services.7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders.8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements.9. Complete final cleaning requirements.10. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate

visual defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of






unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.5. Submit final completion photographic documentation.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Name of Architect.d. Name of Contractor.e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:a. Web-based project software upload. Utilize software feature for creating and

updating list of incomplete items (punch list).






1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

D. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranties and bonds in PDF format. Assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

1. Submit by uploading to web-based project software site.

E. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.






c. Rake grounds that are not planted, mulched, or paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent.l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and

similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA ACR. Provide written report on completion of cleaning.

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.






a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.




OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA; SECTION 01 78 23 PAGE 1 of 6

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Systems and equipment operation manuals.2. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation

and maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operation and maintenance submittals is acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. Submit by uploading to web-based project software site. Enable reviewer comments on draft submittals.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.




D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

E. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.

1.5 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

1.6 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.2. Table of contents.3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.2. Name and address of Project.3. Name and address of Owner.4. Date of submittal.5. Name and contact information for Contractor.6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.7. Name and contact information for Architect.8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the

systems contained in the manuals.10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.




1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

1.7 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION MANUALS

A. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and special operating procedures.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.3. Operating standards.4. Operating procedures.5. Operating logs.6. Wiring diagrams.7. Control diagrams.8. Piped system diagrams.9. Precautions against improper use.10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

C. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name.3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.4. Equipment function.5. Operating characteristics.6. Limiting conditions.7. Performance curves.8. Engineering data and tests.9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

D. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:




1. Startup procedures.2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.3. Routine and normal operating instructions.4. Regulation and control procedures.5. Instructions on stopping.6. Normal shutdown instructions.7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color coding where required for identification.

1.8 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data indicating maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency, repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds as described below.

C. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

D. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.




3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

E. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.2. Troubleshooting guide.3. Precautions against improper maintenance.4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

F. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

H. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

I. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

J. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of maintenance manuals.











PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS; SECTION 01 78 39 PAGE 1 of 4

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings.2. Record Specifications.3. Record Product Data.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey.2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:1) Submit record digital data files and one set(s) of plots.2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal:1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one set of prints.2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.






1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.c. Depths of foundations.d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.g. Actual equipment locations.h. Duct size and routing.i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.

C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.2. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

3. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."d. Name of Architect.e. Name of Contractor.






1.5 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.

1.6 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

C. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

1.7 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION


DIVISION 2



SELECTIVE DEMOLITION; SECTION 02 41 19 PAGE 1 of 8

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.




1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.

C. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

D. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.4. Use of elevator and stairs.5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of

Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

E. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.


A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.




1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:

a. None.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Hazardous Materials: Present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.

1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials

except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.3. Owner will provide material safety data sheets for suspected hazardous materials that

are known to be present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished because of building operations or processes performed there.

F. Historic Areas: Demolition and hauling equipment and other materials shall be of sizes that clear surfaces within historic spaces, areas, rooms, and openings, including temporary protection, by 12 inches (300 mm) or more.

G. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

H. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include the following:

1. No warranted systems.

B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.

1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

D. Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for de-tensioning.

E. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations.

F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs.1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide

photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.

2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.




3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Relocated: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place.

c. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

d. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

e. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling

specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.




3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 2 hours after flame-cutting operations.6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site.8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.




3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Remove in small sections. Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove.

B. Asphalt Paving: Demolish in sections.

1. Removal method: Hand Labor only.2. Use of removal by small to heavy equipment is prohibited

C. Cobble-Stone Paving: Demolish in sections.

1. Removal method: Hand Labor only.2. Use of removal by small to heavy equipment is prohibited3. Cobble-stones are to be salvaged on site for re-installation.

3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will

convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management

and Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

3.9 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE

A. Remove:

1. Asphalt Paving: per process listed above in paragraph 3.6.B. above2. Concrete Paving and Sidewalk: per process listed above in paragraph 3.6.A. above

B. Remove and Salvage:

1. Banners: Remove and Salvage for reuse at another city property.

2. Awnings: Remove, clean and store in the (City of Richmond) Seaboard Building at 1501 Franklin ST., Richmond VA. Awnings are to be reused on site and reinstalled as awnings on Legacy Vender Sheds as specified in Section 13 34 23.16 - Fabricated Control Booths.




3. Weather Vane: Remove and turn over to the Enrichmond Foundation (100 N 17th St, Richmond, VA 23219).

4. Existing Metal Sheds: Dismantle and ship to Richmond Parks and Recreation, Pine Camp Location.

5. Plank Market Wood Sign (reading “17th Street Farmers Market”): Remove and ship to Richmond Parks and Recreation, Pine Camp Location.

C. Remove, Clean and Reinstall:

1. Strand Lighting: existing Farmer’s Market Strand Lighting to be removed and re-installed on the construction fencing; refer to Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls.

2. Bulls Head: Remove the two bull’s heads and pedestals. Clean and restore bulls head/s. Heads to be stored off-site in the (City of Richmond) Seaboard Building at 1501 Franklin ST., Richmond VA for reinstallation.

3. Ornamental Finials: Remove, clean, and restore Finials to be stored off-site in the (City of Richmond) Seaboard Building at 1501 Franklin ST., Richmond VA for reinstallation.

4. Bell: Remove, clean, and restore. Bell to be stored off-site in the (City of Richmond) Seaboard Building at 1501 Franklin ST., Richmond VA for reinstallation.

5. Farmers Market (steel rod) Sign: Remove, clean and restore; Sign to be stored off-site in the (City of Richmond) Seaboard Building at 1501 Franklin ST., Richmond VA for reinstallation.

6. Flags: Remove, clean and store in the (City of Richmond) Seaboard Building at 1501 Franklin ST., Richmond VA for reinstallation.

D. Existing to Remain:

1. None.

E. Dismantle:

1. None


DIVISION 3




CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE; SECTION 03 30 00Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 15Copyright 2016 © DMWPV

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.2. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent.b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.d. Concrete Subcontractor.e. Special concrete finish Subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, forms, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.






A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.2. Indicate locations on the project where each mix design is intended to be used.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.2. Admixtures.3. Form materials and form-release agents.4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.5. Curing compounds.6. Floor and slab treatments.7. Bonding agents.8. Adhesives.9. Repair materials.

D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:

1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

E. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.





B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M.

1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.


A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301.2. ACI 117.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, as drawn.

C. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.





2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 36, smooth, galvanized steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II.2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 120.4. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal, typical. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

F. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

2.6 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.





B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

2.7 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

2.8 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.





1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.2. Slag Cement: 50 percent.3. Silica Fume: 10 percent.4. Limit total percentage of portland cement substitutes to 50 percent.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement, typical.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50.

4. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride or chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. All normal weight concrete except slabs-on-grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated at 28 days.2. Slump Limit: 5 inches, 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before

adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.

3. Air Content:

a. At exterior exposed conditions and as indicated on drawings. 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

b. All other conditions: No air entrainment required.

2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.12 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.





1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.





3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.





1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.3. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or

partially hardened concrete surfaces.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Notify the Owner's Inspection Service to permit inspection of sub-base a minimum of 24 hours prior to placement of reinforcing steel and concrete. The Inspection Service shall inspect and approve all foundation subgrades prior to placing concrete.

C. Notify the Owner's Inspection Service to permit inspection of reinforcing steel a minimum of 24 hours prior to concrete placement. Notify Inspection Service 24 hours prior to any scheduled concrete pour.

D. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless withheld at the plant as indicated on delivery ticket and approved by Architect.

E. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

F. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

G. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.





5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed-finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor toppings and to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish or to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing.





D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water.b. Continuous water-fog spray.c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven





days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.





4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.2. Steel reinforcement welding.3. Headed bolts and studs.4. Verification of use of required design mixture.5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.7. Post-installed anchor installation.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for





each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567/C 567M, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure one set of six 4 x 8 cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M.

a. 4 x 8 Specimens: Test two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of three specimens at 28 days. Test one specimen at 56 days if required.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.


DIVISION 4


MASONRY CLEANING; SECTION 04 01 10PAGE 1 of 8

SECTION 040110 - MASONRY CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cleaning if required to the following:

1. Coble-Stone surfaces; stored at City of Richmond Salvage Yard - Parker Field2. Coble-Stone surfaces; stored at City of Richmond Salvage Yard.

1.3 ALLOWANCES

A. Allowances for cleaning masonry are specified in Section 012100 "Allowances."

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Very Low-Pressure Spray: Under 100 psi (690 kPa).

B. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi (690 to 2750 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 L/s).

C. Medium-Pressure Spray: 400 to 800 psi (2750 to 5510 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 L/s).

D. High-Pressure Spray: 800 to 1200 psi (5510 to 8250 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 L/s).



1. Review methods and procedures related to cleaning masonry including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Verify masonry-cleaning equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

b. Materials, material application, and sequencing.c. Cleaning program.d. Coordination with building occupants.



1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Work Sequence: Perform masonry-cleaning work in the following sequence:

1. Remove plant growth.2. Remove asphalt and tar.3. Remove paint.4. Clean masonry surfaces.5. Where water repellents are to be used on or near masonry, delay application of these

chemicals until after cleaning.



1. Include material descriptions and application instructions.2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.


A. Qualification Data: For paint-remover manufacturer and chemical-cleaner manufacturer.

B. Preconstruction Test Reports: For cleaning materials and methods.

C. Cleaning program.


A. Paint-Remover Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm regularly engaged in producing masonry cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and with factory-authorized service representatives who are available for consultation and Project-site inspection, preconstruction product testing, and on-site assistance.

B. Chemical-Cleaner Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm regularly engaged in producing masonry cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and with factory-authorized service representatives who are available for consultation and Project-site inspection, preconstruction product testing, and on-site assistance.

C. Cleaning Program: Prepare a written cleaning program that describes cleaning process in detail, including materials, methods, and equipment to be used; protection of surrounding materials; and control of runoff during operations. Include provisions for supervising worker performance and preventing damage.

1. If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for any phase of cleaning work, add a written description of such materials and methods, including evidence of successful use on comparable projects and demonstrations to show their effectiveness for this Project.

D. Mockups: Prepare mockups of cleaning on existing surfaces to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Cleaning: Clean an area as indicated for each type of masonry and surface condition.



a. Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse reactions. Do not test cleaners and methods known to have deleterious effect.

b. Allow a waiting period of not less than seven days after completion of sample cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.


A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage one or more chemical-cleaner and paint-remover manufacturers to perform preconstruction testing on masonry surfaces.

1. Use test areas as indicated and representative of proposed materials and existing construction.

2. Propose changes to materials and methods to suit Project.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit masonry-cleaning work to be performed according to product manufacturers' written instructions and specified requirements.

B. Clean masonry surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and is predicted to remain so for at least seven days after completion of cleaning.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT REMOVERS

A. Alkaline Paste Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard alkaline paste or gel formulation, for removing paint from masonry; containing no methylene chloride.

1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance provide Sure Klean® Fast Acting Stripper Paint, Coating & Graffiti Remover by PROSOCO Inc. or equal by one of the following:a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; a division of Sandell Construction Solutionsb. Hydroclean; Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc

B. Asphalt & Tar Solvent-Type Paste Remover: Manufacturer's standard water-rinsable, solvent-type paste or gel formulation, for removing paint from masonry

1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance provide Sure Klean® Asphalt & Tar Remover by PROSOCO Inc. or equal by one of the following:a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; a division of Sandell Construction Solutionsb. Hydroclean; Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc

2.2 CLEANING MATERIALS

A. Water: Potable.



B. Hot Water: Water heated to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F (60 to 71 deg C).

C. Detergent Solution, Job Mixed: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups (0.5 L) of tetrasodium pyrophosphate (TSPP), 1/2 cup (125 mL) of laundry detergent, and 20 quarts (20 L) of hot water for every 5 gal. (20 L) of solution required.

D. Mold, Mildew, and Algae Remover, Job Mixed: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups (0.5 L) of tetrasodium pyrophosphate (TSPP), 5 quarts (5 L) of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite (bleach), and 15 quarts (15 L) of hot water for every 5 gal. (20 L) of solution required.

E. One-Part Limestone Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard one-part acidic formulation for cleaning limestone.

1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance provide Sure Klean® 766 Limestone & Masonry Prewash by PROSOCO Inc. or equal by one of the following:a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; a division of Sandell Construction Solutionsb. Hydroclean; Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc

2. Surface Neutralization: Treated surfaces must be neutralized by applying a solution of the proper cleaning compound pursuant to the application instructions on the product label.a. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance provide Sure Klean® Restoration

Cleaner by PROSOCO Inc. or equal

2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Liquid Strippable Masking Agent: Manufacturer's standard liquid, film-forming, strippable masking material for protecting glass, metal, glazed masonry, and polished stone surfaces from damaging effects of acidic and alkaline masonry cleaners.

1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance provide Sure Klean® 766 Strippable Masking by PROSOCO Inc. or equal by one of the following:a. American Building Restoration Products, Inc.

2.4 CHEMICAL CLEANING SOLUTIONS

A. Dilute chemical cleaners with water to produce solutions not exceeding concentration recommended in writing by chemical-cleaner manufacturer.

B. Acidic Cleaner Solution for Nonglazed Masonry: Dilute acidic cleaner with water to produce hydrofluoric acid content of 3 percent or less, but not greater than that recommended in writing by chemical-cleaner manufacturer.

1. Stones: Use only on unpolished granite, unpolished dolomite marble, and siliceous sandstone.

C. Acidic Cleaner for Polished Stone: Dilute acidic cleaner with water to concentration demonstrated by testing that does not etch or otherwise damage glazed or polished surface, but not greater than that recommended in writing by chemical-cleaner manufacturer.

1. Stones: Use only on polished granite and polished dolomite marble.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MASONRY-CLEANING SPECIALIST

A. Masonry-Cleaning Specialist Firms: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide masonry cleaning by one of the following:

1. Addo Corporation & Cornerstone Masonry; Richmond VA 232222. Ronnie Delgato; Riverside Brick; Richmond, Virginia 3. Stockners; Richmond, Virginia 23146

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Comply with each manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building and other surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. Prevent paint removers and chemical cleaning solutions from coming into contact with people, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be harmed by such contact.

1. Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist paint removers and chemical cleaners used unless products being used will not damage adjacent surfaces. Use protective materials that are waterproof and UV resistant. Apply masking agents according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid strippable masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove masking to prevent adhesive staining.

2. Do not apply chemical solutions during winds of enough force to spread them to unprotected surfaces.

3. Neutralize alkaline and acid wastes before disposal.4. Dispose of runoff from operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil

erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors.

3.3 CLEANING MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Cleaning Appearance Standard: Cleaned surfaces are to have a uniform appearance as viewed from 20 feet (6 m) away by Architect.

B. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner. Ensure that dirty residues and rinse water do not wash over dry, cleaned surfaces.

C. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location.

1. Brushes: Do not use wire brushes or brushes that are not resistant to chemical cleaner being used.

2. Spray Equipment: Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure indicated, measured at nozzle. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning methods do not damage surfaces, including joints.

a. Equip units with pressure gages.b. For chemical-cleaner spray application, use low-pressure tank or chemical pump

suitable for chemical cleaner indicated, equipped with nozzle having a cone-shaped spray.

c. For water-spray application, use fan-shaped spray that disperses water at an angle of 25 to 50 degrees.



d. For high-pressure water-spray application, use fan-shaped spray that disperses water at an angle of at least 40 degrees.

e. For heated water-spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining temperature between 140 and 160 deg F (60 and 71 deg C) at flow rates indicated.

f. For steam application, use steam generator capable of delivering live steam at nozzle.

D. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging masonry surfaces. Keep wall wet below area being cleaned to prevent streaking from runoff.

E. Perform additional general cleaning, paint and stain removal, and spot cleaning of small areas that are noticeably different when viewed according to the "Cleaning Appearance Standard" Paragraph, so that cleaned surfaces blend smoothly into surrounding areas.

F. Water Application Methods:

1. Water-Spray Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least 6 inches (150 mm) from masonry surface and apply water in horizontal back-and-forth sweeping motion, overlapping previous strokes to produce uniform coverage.

G. Steam Cleaning: Apply steam to masonry surfaces at the very low pressures indicated for each type of masonry. Hold nozzle at least 6 inches (150 mm) from masonry surface and apply steam in horizontal back-and-forth sweeping motion, overlapping previous strokes to produce uniform coverage.

H. Chemical-Cleaner Application Methods: Apply chemical cleaners to masonry surfaces according to chemical-cleaner manufacturer's written instructions; use brush or spray application. Do not spray apply at pressures exceeding 50 psi (345 kPa). Do not allow chemicals to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended in writing by manufacturer.

I. Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each treated area at each stage or scaffold setting. Periodically during each rinse, test pH of rinse water running off of cleaned area to determine that chemical cleaner is completely removed.

1. Apply neutralizing agent and repeat rinse if necessary to produce tested pH of between 6.7 and 7.5.

J. After cleaning is complete, remove protection no longer required. Remove tape and adhesive marks.

3.4 PRELIMINARY CLEANING

A. Removing Plant Growth: Completely remove visible plant, moss, and shrub growth from masonry surfaces. Carefully remove plants, creepers, and vegetation by cutting at roots and allowing remaining growth to dry as long as possible before removal. Remove loose soil and plant debris from open joints to whatever depth they occur.

B. Preliminary Cleaning: Before beginning general cleaning, remove extraneous substances that are resistant to planned cleaning methods. Extraneous substances include paint, calking, asphalt, and tar.

1. Carefully remove heavy accumulations of rigid materials from masonry surface with sharp chisel. Do not scratch or chip masonry surface.



2. Remove paint and calking with alkaline paint remover.

a. Comply with requirements in "Paint Removal" Article.b. Repeat application up to two times if needed.

3. Remove asphalt and tar with solvent-type paste paint remover.

a. Comply with requirements in "Paint Removal" Article.b. Apply paint remover only to asphalt and tar by brush without prewetting.c. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for 10 to 30 minutes.d. Repeat application if needed.

3.5 PAINT REMOVAL

A. Paint-Remover Application, General: Apply paint removers according to paint-remover manufacturer's written instructions. Do not allow paint removers to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended in writing by manufacturer.

B. Paint Removal with Alkaline Paste Paint Remover:

1. Remove loose and peeling paint using medium-pressure water spray, scrapers, stiff brushes, or a combination of these. Let surface dry thoroughly.

2. Apply paint remover to dry, painted surface with brushes.3. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended in writing by

manufacturer or as determined by preconstruction testing.4. Rinse with hot water applied by low-pressure spray to remove chemicals and paint

residue.5. Repeat process if necessary to remove all paint.6. Apply acidic cleaner or manufacturer's recommended afterwash to surface, while surface

is still wet, using low-pressure spray equipment or soft-fiber brush. Let cleaner or afterwash remain on surface as a neutralizing agent for period recommended in writing by chemical-cleaner or afterwash manufacturer.

7. Rinse with cold water applied by low-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil.

C. Asphalt & Tar Removal with Solvent-Type Paste Remover:

1. Remove loose and peeling paint using medium-pressure water spray, scrapers, stiff brushes, or a combination of these. Let surface dry thoroughly.

2. Apply thick coating of paint remover to painted surface with natural-fiber cleaning brush, deep-nap roller, or large paint brush. Apply in one or two coats according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended in writing by manufacturer or as determined by preconstruction testing.

4. Rinse with hot water applied by low-pressure spray to remove chemicals and paint residue.

3.6 CLEANING MASONRY

A. Hot-Water Wash: Use hot water applied by low-pressure spray.

B. Steam Cleaning: Apply steam at very low pressures not exceeding 30 psi (207 kPa). Remove dirt softened by steam with wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, or cold-water wash, as indicated by cleaning tests.

C. One-Part Limestone Chemical Cleaning:



1. Wet surface with hot water applied by low-pressure spray.2. Apply cleaner to surface by brush or low-pressure spray.3. Let cleaner remain on surface for period recommended in writing by chemical-cleaner

manufacturer.4. Immediately treat with Surface Neutralization; Treated surfaces must be neutralized by

applying a solution of the proper cleaning compound pursuant to the application instructions on the product label over the same area

5. Rinse with hot water applied by medium-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil.

3.7 FINAL CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent nonmasonry surfaces of spillage and debris. Use detergent and soft brushes or cloths.

B. Remove debris from gutters and downspouts. Rinse off roof and flush gutters and downspouts.

C. Remove masking materials, leaving no residues that could trap dirt.


DIVISION 5




ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING; SECTION 05 12 13Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6Copyright 2016 © DMWPV

SECTION 051213 - ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes architecturally exposed structural-steel (AESS).

1. Requirements in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" also apply to AESS.


1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements applicable to AESS.

2. Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" for surface preparation and priming requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Category 1 AESS: AESS that is within 96 inches vertically and 36 inches horizontally of a walking surface and that is visible to a person standing on that walking surface or is designated as "Category 1 architecturally exposed structural steel" or "AESS-1" in the Contract Documents.

B. Category 2 AESS: AESS that is within 20 feet vertically and horizontally of a walking surface and that is visible to a person standing on that walking surface or is designated as "Category 2 architecturally exposed structural steel" or "AESS-2" in the Contract Documents.

C. Category 3 AESS: AESS that is not defined as Category 1 or Category 2 or that is designated as "Category 3 architecturally exposed structural steel" or "AESS-3" in the Contract Documents or that is indicated to receive intumescent mastic fireproofing.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.








A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of AESS components. Shop Drawings for structural steel may be used for AESS provided items of AESS are specifically identified and requirements below are met for AESS.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.2. Include embedment Drawings.3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. Indicate grinding, finish, and profile of welds.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections. Indicate orientation of bolt heads.

5. Indicate exposed surfaces and edges and surface preparation being used.6. Indicate special tolerances and erection requirements.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.

B. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.


A. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1 or SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."

B. Mockups: Build mockups of AESS to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical portion of AESS as indicated by Architect.2. Coordinate high-performance coatings requirements with Section 099600 "High-

Performance Coatings."3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.


A. Use special care in handling to prevent twisting, warping, nicking, and other damage. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.






A. Field Measurements: Where AESS is indicated to fit against other construction, verify actual dimensions by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FILLER

A. Filler: Polyester filler intended for use in repairing dents in automobile bodies.

2.2 PRIMER

A. Primer for Interior AESS Locations: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

B. Primer for Exterior AESS Locations: Carbozinc 859 by Carboline - organic zinc-rich epoxy.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate and assemble AESS to the maximum extent possible. Locate field joints at concealed locations if possible. Detail assemblies to minimize handling and to expedite erection.

B. In addition to special care used to handle and fabricate AESS, comply with the following:

1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust, scale, and roughness.

2. Grind sheared, punched, and flame-cut edges of Category 1 AESS to remove burrs and provide smooth surfaces and edges.

3. Fabricate Category 1 AESS with exposed surfaces free of mill marks, including rolled trade names and stamped or raised identification.

4. Fabricate Category 1 and Category 2 AESS with exposed surfaces free of seams to maximum extent possible.

5. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating, and shop priming.

6. Fabricate with piece marks fully hidden in the completed structure or made with media that permits full removal after erection.

7. Fabricate Category 1 AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is designated AESS.

8. Fabricate Category 2 and Category 3 AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is not designated AESS.

9. Seal-weld open ends of hollow structural sections with 3/8-inch closure plates for AESS.

C. Curved Members: Fabricate indicated members to curved shape by rolling to final shape in fabrication shop.

1. Distortion of webs, stems, outstanding flanges, and legs of angles shall not be visible from a distance of 20 feet under any lighting conditions.





2. Tolerances for walls of hollow steel sections after rolling shall be approximately 1/2 inch.

D. Coping, Blocking, and Joint Gaps: Maintain uniform gaps of 1/8 inch with a tolerance of 1/32 inch for Category 1 AESS.

E. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.4 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless noted otherwise.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work, and comply with the following:

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding specified tolerances.

2. Use weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment for AESS that limit distortions to allowable tolerances.

3. Provide continuous, sealed welds at angle to gusset-plate connections and similar locations where AESS is exposed to weather.

4. Provide continuous welds of uniform size and profile where Category 1 AESS is welded.5. Make butt and groove welds flush to adjacent surfaces within tolerance of plus 1/16 inch,

minus zero inch for Category 1 AESS. Do not grind unless required for clearances or for fitting other components, or unless directed to correct unacceptable work.

6. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs; back-gouge and grind steel smooth for Category 1 and Category 2 AESS.

7. At locations where welding on the far side of an exposed connection of Category 1 and Category 2 AESS occurs, grind distortions and marking of the steel to a smooth profile aligned with adjacent material.

8. Make fillet welds for Category 1 and Category 2 AESS of uniform size and profile with exposed face smooth and slightly concave. Do not grind unless directed to correct unacceptable work.

2.5 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches.

2. Surfaces to be field welded.3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.





4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.5. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation for Nongalvanized Steel: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide minimum dry film thickness indicated below. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or

erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.3. Provide minimum dry film thickness of 3.0 mils for AESS at exterior locations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Examine AESS for twists, kinks, warping, gouges, and other imperfections before erecting.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep AESS secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

1. If possible, locate welded tabs for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling where they will be concealed from view in the completed Work.

2. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set AESS accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.





1. Erect Category 1 AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is designated AESS.

2. Erect Category 2 and Category 3 AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is not designated AESS.

B. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless noted otherwise.2. Orient bolt heads in same direction for each connection and to maximum extent possible

in same direction for similar connections.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with requirements in "Weld Connections" Paragraph in "Shop Connections" Article.

1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs; back-gouge and grind steel smooth for Category 1 and Category 2 AESS.

2. Remove erection bolts in Category 1 and Category 2 AESS, fill holes, and grind smooth.3. Fill weld access holes in Category 1 and Category 2 AESS and grind smooth.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect AESS as specified in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing." The testing agency is not responsible for enforcing requirements relating to aesthetic effect.

B. Architect will observe AESS in place to determine acceptability relating to aesthetic effect.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove welded tabs that were used for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling and that are exposed to view in the completed Work. Grind steel smooth.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

C. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.






METAL FABRICATIONS; SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 1 of 9

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for countertops.2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.3. Shelf angles4. Metal Ladders5. Elevator pit sump covers.6. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other

Sections.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Loose steel lintels.2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts

indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not

specified in other Sections.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.

2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing."

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: For the following:






1. Paint products.2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:

1. Steel framing and supports for countertops.2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.3. Shelf angles.4. Elevator pit sump covers.5. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other

Sections.


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

F. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.

1. Size of Channels: As indicated.2. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33

(Grade 230); 0.0677-inch (1.7-mm) minimum thickness; unfinished.

G. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.

I. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.

J. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

K. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.

L. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze).

M. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400 (leaded semired brass).

N. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151/B 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500.

O. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel bronze).






2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3 (ASTM A 325M, Type 3); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3 (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3); and, where indicated, flat washers.

D. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1 (A1).

E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

F. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

G. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

H. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).

I. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.






2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

B. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.






G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.

2.7 SHELF ANGLES

A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners.2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint

approximately 2 inches (50 mm) larger than expansion or control joint.

B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete.

C. Galvanize and prime shelf angles located in exterior walls.

D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.

E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete.

2.8 METAL LADDERS

A. General:






1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, except for elevator pit ladders.2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Aluminum Ladders:

1. Manufacturers:a. Alabama Metal Industries Corp (AMICO)b. Alco-Lite Industrial Productsc. O'Keeffe's Inc.

2. Space siderails 18 inches (457 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated.3. Siderails: Continuous extruded-aluminum channels or tubes, not less than 2-1/2 inches

(64 mm) deep, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick.4. Rungs: Extruded-aluminum tubes, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep and not less than

1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, with ribbed tread surfaces.5. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; fasten by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners or

brackets and aluminum rivets.6. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from pressure-locked aluminum bar grating,

supported by extruded-aluminum framing. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) in least dimension.

7. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with welded or bolted aluminum brackets.

8. Provide minimum 72-inch- (1830-mm-) high, hinged security door with padlock hasp at foot of ladder to prevent unauthorized ladder use.

2.9 ELEVATOR PIT SUMP COVERS

A. Fabricate from welded or pressure-locked steel bar grating Limit openings in gratings to no more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in least dimension.

B. Provide steel angle supports as indicated.

2.10 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

B. Galvanize plates.

C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.

2.11 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.






2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.

C. Shop prime iron and steel items unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2.14 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M12.

B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, AA-M12C22A41.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.






D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:

1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for ceiling hung toilet partitions, overhead doors and overhead grilles securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.

3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.


DIVISION 9





EXTERIOR PAINTING; SECTION 099113PAGE 1 of 8

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates:

1. Concrete.2. Steel and iron.3. Galvanized metal.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

2. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system.3. Label each coat of each Sample.






4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.


4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Benjamin Moore & Co.2. Duron, Inc.3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The)

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the Exterior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.






B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent.3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.4. Wood: 15 percent.5. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent.6. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.

D. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer[.] [ but not less than the following:]

1. SSPC-SP 2.2. SSPC-SP 3.3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4.4. SSPC-SP 11.






G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

J. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final

installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door

frames.4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes.5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed

or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed to view:

a. Equipment, including panelboards[ and switch gear].b. Uninsulated metal piping.c. Uninsulated plastic piping.d. Pipe hangers and supports.e. Metal conduit.f. Plastic conduit.g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.







A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System[ MPI EXT 3.1C]:a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based[, MPI #3].b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching

topcoat.c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (MPI Gloss

Level 3)[, MPI #161].

B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:

1. Latex Deck Coating System[ MPI EXT 3.2B]:a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.c. Topcoat: Deck coating, latex[, MPI #127].

2. Clear Sealer System[ MPI EXT 3.2G]:a. Prime Coat: Sealer, solvent based, matching topcoat.b. Intermediate Coat: Sealer, solvent based, matching topcoat.c. Topcoat: Sealer, solvent based, for concrete floors[, MPI #104].

C. Steel and Iron Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System[MPI EXT 5.1M] [MPI EXT 5.1N]:a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust inhibitive, water based[ MPI #107].b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified.






c. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat.

d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #163].

2. Quick-Dry Enamel System[ MPI EXT 5.1A]:a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal[, MPI #76].b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, quick dry, matching topcoat.c. Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #81].

D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System [MPI EXT 5.3J] [MPI EXT 5.3K]:a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based[, MPI #134].b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching

topcoat.c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss

Level 5)[, MPI #163].








HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS; SECTION 09 96 00Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 5

SECTION 09 96 00 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of high-performance coating systems. on the following substrates:1. Exterior Substrates:

a. Steel.b. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" and Section 05 12 13 "Architecturally

Exposed Structural Steel Framing"for shop priming of structural steel with primers specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category

specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.1. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of

each coating system.2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.






A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:1. Devoe Paint Company; Akzo Nobel.2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and

substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


A. Testing of Coating Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=11657&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123457035187&mf=04&src=wd





1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If coating materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials

being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie

coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer[.][ but not less than the following:]

1. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4.2. SSPC-SP 11.3. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3.4. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2.5. SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1.



E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied coatings.

3.3 APPLICATION – POWDER COATING

A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Coat backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing.2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.



C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Pigmented Polyurethane over Self-Priming Epoxy System MPI INT 5.1U:a. Prime Coat: Epoxy, high build, self-priming , MPI #120.

1) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.b. Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane, two component, pigmented, matching topcoat.c. Topcoat: Polyurethane, two component, pigmented, gloss (MPI Gloss

Level 6), MPI #72.1) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

B. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:

1. Pigmented Polyurethane System MPI INT 5.4C:a. Prime Coat: Primer, vinyl wash, MPI #80.

1) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.

1) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.c. Topcoat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss (MPI Gloss

Level 6), MPI #72.1) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

END OF SECTION 09 96 00

DIVISION 12


SITE FURNISHINGS; SECTION 12 93 00Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 5

SECTION 12 93 00 - SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bicycle racks.2. Trash receptacles.3. Bollards.


1. Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for excavation for installing concrete footings.



B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, not less than 6-inch- long linear components and 4-inch- square sheet components.

1. Include full-size Samples of bench table bicycle rack. Approved samples may be incorporated into the Work.

C. Product Schedule: For site furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Maintenance Data: For site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Bench Replacement: No fewer than two full-size units for each size indicated.2. Trash Receptacle Inner Containers: full-size units for each size indicated, but no fewer

than units.3. Anchors: No fewer than four units of each type.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BICYCLE RACKS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product R-7906 Post & Ring Bike Bollard by Reliance Foundry Co. Ltd., as indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Landscape Forms.

B. Bicycle Rack Construction:

1. Frame: Aluminum.a. Pipe OD: Not less than 1-5/8 inches.b. Locking Bars: Solid round bar, not less than 3/4 inch in diameter.

2. Style: Bollard as indicated on Drawings.a. Overall Height: 36-inchb. Overall Width: 4-inchc. Capacity: Designed to accommodate no fewer than two bicycles.

3. Installation Method: Cast in concrete Bolted to cast-in anchor bolts.

C. Aluminum Finish: Color coated.

1. Color: Black.

2.2 TRASH RECEPTACLES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. City of Richmond is the following:

1. Bigbelly® Smartbelly® by Bigbelly Solar, Inc.

B. Steel Facing Surrounds: Steel sheet Insert material and description.

2.3 BOLLARDS - FIXED

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product Bollard type 7530 by Reliance Foundry Co. Ltd., as indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Canterbury International.

B. Bollard Construction:

1. Cast Iron OD: Not less than 10 inches, fluted.a. Overall Height: 39-inchb. Cast Iron: As indicated.

2. Aluminum Finish: Color coateda. Color: Black






2.4 BOLLARDS - RETRACTABLE

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product Bollard type R-8472-RA by Reliance Foundry Co. Ltd., as indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Sternberg Lighting.

B. Bollard Construction:

1. Cast Iron OD: Not less than 10 inches, fluted.a. Overall Height: 39-inchb. Cast Iron: As indicated.

2. Aluminum Finish: Color coateda. Color: Black

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated; free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:

1. Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429/B 429M.2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 .3. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.

B. Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:

1. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.2. Steel Pipe: Standard-weight steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, or electric-

resistance-welded pipe complying with ASTM A 135/A 135M.3. Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500/A 500M.4. Perforated Metal: From steel sheet not less than 0.120-inch nominal thickness;

manufacturer's standard perforation pattern.5. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 200.

C. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Galvanized steel Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant-coated or noncorrodible materials; commercial quality, tamperproof, vandal and theft resistant , concealed, recessed, and capped or plugged.

1. Angle Anchors: For inconspicuously bolting legs of site furnishings to below-grade substrate

2. Antitheft Hold-Down Brackets: For securing site furnishings to substrate; Insert extent.

D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.

E. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound; resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating; recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.



2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard polyester powder-coat finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

2.7 IRON FINISHES

A. Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard polyester powder-coat finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed.

C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on Drawings.

D. Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed water. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set plumb or at correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts in position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.

E. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core-drill holes for installing posts in concrete to depth recommended in writing by manufacturer of site furnishings and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.

F. Pipe Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.


DIVISION 22


FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING; SECTION 22 11 13Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 10

SECTION 221113 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for water service.

B. Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for installation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail precast concrete vault assemblies and indicate dimensions, method of field assembly, and components.


A. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention.

2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.

3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.

B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping.



D. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-service-main products.

E. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression.

F. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable-water-service piping. Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping.

2. Comply with NSF 61 Annex G for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic water.


A. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.2. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Owner's written

permission.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

B. PVC, AWWA Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 150, with bell end with gasket, and with spigot end.

1. Comply with UL 1285 for fire-service mains if indicated.2. PVC Fabricated Fittings: AWWA C900, Class 150, with bell-and-spigot or double-bell

ends. Include elastomeric gasket in each bell.3. PVC Molded Fittings: AWWA C907, Class 150, with bell-and-spigot or double-bell ends.

Include elastomeric gasket in each bell.

4. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.



2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Section 330500 "Common Work Results for Utilities" for commonly used joining materials.

B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series.

C. Bonding Adhesive for Fiberglass Piping: As recommended by fiberglass piping manufacturer.

D. Plastic Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

B. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings:

1. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners and with ends of same sizes as piping to be joined.a. Standard: AWWA C219.

2.4 GATE VALVES

A. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:

1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance provide Product as listed on the Drawings or City of Richmond approved equal.

2. Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-

iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.1) Standard: AWWA C509.2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).3) End Connections: Mechanical joint.4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.

B. UL/FMG, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:


2. UL/FMG, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:a. Description: Iron body and bonnet with flange for indicator post, bronze seating

material, and inside screw.1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved.2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa).3) End Connections: Flanged.

3. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves:a. Description: Iron body and bonnet and bronze seating material.

1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved.2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa).



3) End Connections: Flanged.

2.5 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies:


2. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine.

a. Standard: MSS SP-60.b. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted sleeve

with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve.

c. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valve with one raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.

B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 5 inches (125 mm) in diameter.

1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.

C. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FMG-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve.

2.6 WATER METERS

A. Water meters will be furnished by utility company.

B. Manufacturers:


C. Compound-Type Water Meters:

1. Description:a. Standard: AWWA C702.b. Registration: Flow in gallons (liters).

2.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:


2. Standard: ASSE 1013 or AWWA C511.3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.



5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; [flanged] <Insert type> for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

7. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; OS&Y gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow preventer connection.

2.8 WATER METER BOXES

A. Description: Polymer-concrete body and cover for disc-type water meter, with lettering "WATER" in cover; and with slotted, open-bottom base section of length to fit over service piping. Include vertical and lateral design loadings of 15,000 lb minimum over 10 by 10 inches (6800 kg minimum over 254 by 254 mm) square.

2.9 PRECAST FIBERGLASS VALVES BOXES

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance below provide fiberglass enclosures as indicated on the Drawings; or equal by one of the following manufacturers.

1. Oldcastle Precast Inc.; FIBRELYTE®

B. Reinforced fiberglass vault enclosures are required to meet the following:

1. Accelerated Service Exposure in accordance with ASTM D756G, Procedure E2. Simulated Sunlight in accordance with ASTM G533. Water Absorption in accordance with ASTM D570, Section 5 & 6.14. Flammability in accordance with ASTM D6355. Flexural Strength in accordance with ASTMD790, Method 16. Chemical Resistance in accordance with ASTM D543, Procedure 1

C. Joint material meeting the following:

1. Joints: O-ring rubber gaskets in accordance with ASTM C443.2. Joints: Butyl rubber gaskets in accordance with ASTM C990.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Refer to Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications.



B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.

D. Flanges, unions, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults.

E. Underground water-service piping NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150) shall be any of the following:1. Ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical-joint fittings; and

mechanical joints.2. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150): NPS 6 (DN 150) PVC, AWWA Class 150 pipe;

PVC, AWWA Class 150 molded fittings; and gasketed joints.

F. Water Meter Box Water-Service Piping PS 3/4 to NPS 2 (DN 20 to DN 50) shall be same as underground water-service piping.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for NPS 3 (DN 80) and larger underground installation. Use threaded- or flanged-end valves for installation in vaults. Use UL/FMG, nonrising-stem gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use corporation valves and curb valves with ends compatible with piping, for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller installation.

B. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Underground Valves, NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient or high-pressure, resilient-seated gate valves with valve box.

2. Underground Valves, NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger, for Indicator Posts: UL/FMG, cast-iron, nonrising-stem gate valves with indicator post.

3.4 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. See Section 330500 "Common Work Results for Utilities" for piping-system common requirements.

3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Water-Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in water main.

B. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company and of size and in location indicated.

C. Make connections larger than NPS 2 (DN 50) with tapping machine according to the following:

1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP-60.2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve.3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main.

Remove tapping machine and connect water-service piping.



4. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP-60. Install valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

D. Make connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller with drilling machine according to the following:

1. Install service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves in size, quantity, and arrangement required by utility company standards.

2. Install service-saddle assemblies on water-service pipe to be tapped. Position outlets for corporation valves.

3. Use drilling machine compatible with service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves. Drill hole in main. Remove drilling machine and connect water-service piping.

4. Install corporation valves into service-saddle assemblies.5. Install manifold for multiple taps in water main.6. Install curb valve in water-service piping with head pointing up and with service box.

E. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

F. Install PE pipe according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 645.

G. Install PVC, AWWA pipe according to ASTM F 645 and AWWA M23.

H. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 30 inches (750 mm), with top at least 12 inches (300 mm) below level of maximum frost penetration.

I. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building-water-piping systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.

1. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building-water-piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building-water-piping systems when those systems are installed.

J. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.

3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. See Section 330500 "Common Work Results for Utilities" for basic piping joint construction.

3.7 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION

A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and restrained-joint types that may be used include the following:

1. Concrete thrust blocks.2. Locking mechanical joints.3. Pipe clamps and tie rods.

B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems:

1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600.2. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23.3. Fire-Service-Main Piping: According to NFPA 24.



C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices.

3.8 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

B. UL/FMG, Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.

C. MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system.

D. Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed up and with service box.

3.9 WATER METER INSTALLATION

A. Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to utility company's written instructions.

B. Water Meters: Install displacement-type water meters, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, in meter boxes with shutoff valves on water meter inlets. Include valves on water meter outlets and valved bypass around meters unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Water Meters: Install compound-type water meters, NPS 3 (DN 80) and larger, in meter vaults. Include shutoff valves on water meter inlets and outlets and valved bypass around meters. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.

3.10 BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Do not install backflow preventers that have relief drain in vault or in other spaces subject to flooding.

C. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

D. Support NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger backflow preventers, valves, and piping near floor and on brick or concrete piers.

3.11 WATER METER BOX INSTALLATION

A. Install water meter boxes in paved areas flush with surface.

3.12 CONNECTIONS

A. See Section 330500 "Common Work Results for Utilities" for piping connections to valves and equipment.




A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.

B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours.

1. Increase pressure in 50-psig (350-kPa) increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig (0 kPa). Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts (1.89 L) per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.

C. Prepare reports of testing activities.

3.14 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3.15 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows:

1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet.

3. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows:a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm

of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours.b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine

solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.

c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.

B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.





DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES; SECTION 22 11 19Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hose Bibbs / Hydrants.


1. Section 221113 - Facility Water Distribution Piping for back flow preventers2. Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.3. Section 224713 "Drinking Fountains" for water filters for water coolers.




A. Field quality-control reports.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 14.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig (860 kPa) unless otherwise indicated.



2.3 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs:

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.2. Body Material: Bronze.3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or solder-joint inlet.5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker

complying with ASSE 1011.8. Finish: Rough bronze, or nickel plated.9. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key.10. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.

2.4 HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Hydrants:

1. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for exposed-outlet, self-draining hydrants.2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).3. Operation: Loose key.4. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp.5. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1 (DN 20 or DN 25).6. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.7. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.8. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.9. Nozzle and Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze.10. Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

B. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

C. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.



D. Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.

E. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve and pump.

F. Set nonfreeze, nondraining-type post hydrants in concrete or pavement.

G. Set freeze-resistant yard hydrants with riser pipe in concrete or pavement. Do not encase canister in concrete.

H. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

I. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

J. Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical connections.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.





FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS; SECTION 22 13 13Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6

SECTION 22 13 13 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe and fittings.2. Nonpressure and pressure couplings.3. Cleanouts.4. Manholes.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from sewer system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.


A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.


A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewerage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by the City or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify the City no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without the City’s written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Profile Sewer Piping:



1. Pipe: ASTM F 794, PVC profile, gravity sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints.

2. Fittings: ASTM D 3034, PVC with bell ends.3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

2.2 NONPRESSURE-TYPE TRANSITION COUPLINGS

A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B. Sleeve Materials:

1. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.2. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.

C. Shielded, Flexible Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg.b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

2. Description: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

D. Ring-Type, Flexible Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Fernco Inc.b. Logan Clay Pipe.c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

2. Description: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.

2.3 CLEANOUTS

A. PVC Cleanouts:1. 1. Description: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and

riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping, shall be in accordance with the City of Richmond Department of public Utilities Sanitary Sewer System Design Guidelines and Standard Specifications and Details Manual



2.4 MANHOLES

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes and manhole frames and covers shall be in accordance with the City of Richmond Department of public Utilities Sanitary Sewer System Design Guidelines and Standard Specifications and Details Manual.

2.5 CONCRETE

A. General: Conform to the requirements of VDOT Standard Class A3 concrete unless otherwise indicated.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.

1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.

C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete shall be in accordance with the City of Richmond Department of public Utilities Sanitary Sewer System Design Guidelines and Standard Specifications and Details Manual Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."


A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewer piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.



E. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:

1. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

2. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.

3. Join PVC profile sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric-seal joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints.

B. Pipe couplings, expansion joints, and deflection fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use nonpressure flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping unless otherwise indicated.

a. Shielded flexible couplings for pipes of same or slightly different OD.b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different OD.c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space

between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.

2. Use pressure pipe couplings for force-main joints.

3.4 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. Install Sanitary manholes and manhole frames and covers in accordance with the City of Richmond Department of public Utilities Sanitary Sewer System Design Guidelines and Standard Specifications and Details Manual.

B. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements.


A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards and Specifications.

3.6 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction as illustrated in the Drawings. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping.

B. In vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set top of cleanout flush with grade.



C. In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 PVC pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches deep. Set top of cleanout 1 inch above grade.

D. Comply with requirements for concrete specified in Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.

1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye fitting plus 6-inch overlap with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 or larger, or to underground manholes by cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3 inches of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or manhole wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground.

a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.

b. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials.

4. Protect existing piping and manholes to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.

B. Connect proposed service line from site to existing sanitary sewerage line in per plan accordance with the City of Richmond Department of public Utilities Sanitary Sewer System Design Guidelines and Standard Specifications and Details Manual.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 31200 "Earth Moving" for underground utility identification devices. Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground manholes.

1. Use detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

manholes.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.



1. Submit separate report for each system inspection.2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder

of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction.3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'

advance notice.4. Submit separate report for each test.5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction and the following:

a. Fill sewer piping with water. Test with pressure of at least 10-foot head of water, and maintain such pressure without leakage for at least 15 minutes.

b. Close openings in system and fill with water.c. Purge air and refill with water.d. Disconnect water supply.e. Test and inspect joints for leaks.

6. Manholes: Perform hydraulic test according to ASTM C 969.

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and superfluous material from interior of piping. Flush with potable water.



DRINKING FOUNTAINS; SECTION 22 47 13Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4

SECTION 224713 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes drinking fountains and related components.


A. Product Data: For each type of drinking fountains.


A. Maintenance Data: For drinking fountains to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRINKING FOUNTAINS

A. Drinking Fountains: Painted cast iron or steel, pedestal, wheelchair accessible.

1. Cast-Iron or Steel Drinking Fountains:a. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance provide Product as listed on the Drawings

by Most Dependable Fountains, Inc. or equal by one of the following:1) Elkay2) Haws

2. Standards: Comply with ICC A117.1 and NSF 61 Annex G.3. Pedestal: Round, with direct receptor and with side receptor(s).4. Receptor(s):

a. Number: Two.b. Material: Stainless steel.c. Shape: Round.d. Bubbler: One for each receptor, with adjustable stream regulator.e. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) tailpiece.

5. Maximum water flow: 0.5 gpm.6. Controls: Push button.7. Access to Internal Components: Panel in pedestal.8. Supply Piping: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) with shutoff valve.9. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) minimum trap and waste.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Set pedestal drinking fountains on floor.

C. Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.

D. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball or gate valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Section 22 11 13 "Facility Water Distribution Piping."

E. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system.

F. Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

G. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Install ball or gate shutoff valve on water supply to each fixture. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 221113 "Facility Water Distribution Piping."

D. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221313 "Facility Sanitary Sewers."

3.4 CLEANING

A. After installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.



B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures.

D. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.




DIVISION 26




COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL; SECTION 26 05 00Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4

SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceways and cables.2. Sleeve seals.3. Grout.4. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

B. Submittals: Submittal data shall be clearly marked indicating catalog number, product, materials or devices being used for this project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch .

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.






a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Metraflex Co.

2. Sealing Elements: Interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel Include two for each sealing element.4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.





E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.".

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.









GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 260526Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.3. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.4. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with

copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.





2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad, 10 feet long, 3/4 inch in diameter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No 3/0 AWG minimum. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.2. Lighting circuits.3. Receptacle circuits.4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.6. Flexible raceway runs.

B. Water Heater: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

C. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 6 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.





1. Service and Central Equipment Locations: Terminate grounding conductor on a grounding bus.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least 2 rods spaced at least 6’-0” from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange.

E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.





2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells.

a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

B. Report measured ground resistances values:

C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground is excessive, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.





RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 260533 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.


C. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.



B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

B. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

C. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

D. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.





F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.1. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, set-screw or compression type.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.

B. LFNC: UL 1660.

C. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

D. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.2. Hoffman.3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

C. Description: Sheet metal , NEMA 250, Type 1 and 3R, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

E. Wireway Covers: Screw on.

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

C. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.

D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

E. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized, with gasketed cover.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: IMC conduit 2. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40 PVC, direct buried.3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R and 4 as required.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT identified for such use.

a. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: IMC.

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Electric Solenoid, or

Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.5. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC.6. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT and PVC Schedule 40.7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, in damp or

wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:





1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor.

I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

K. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install as follows:

1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway

unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

L. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

M. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

N. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

O. Recessed Boxes located in Fire Rated Walls: Apply firestopping material. Firestopping material shall be Hilti CP617 putty pad and shall be sized per box dimensions.

P. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of

conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as





temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit.









UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 260543Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 10

SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits and fittings, including GRC and PVC-coated steel conduit.2. Rigid nonmetallic duct.3. Flexible nonmetallic duct.4. Duct accessories.5. Precast concrete handholes.6. Polymer concrete handholes and boxes with polymer concrete cover.7. Fiberglass handholes and boxes with polymer concrete cover.8. Fiberglass handholes and boxes.9. High-density plastic boxes.10. Precast manholes.11. Cast-in-place manholes.12. Utility structure accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Direct Buried: Duct or a duct bank that is buried in the ground, without any additional casing materials such as concrete.

B. Duct: A single duct or multiple ducts. Duct may be either installed singly or as component of a duct bank.

C. Duct Bank:

1. Two or more ducts installed in parallel, with or without additional casing materials.2. Multiple duct banks.

D. GRC: Galvanized rigid (steel) conduit.

E. Trafficways: Locations where vehicular or pedestrian traffic is a normal course of events.



1. Include duct-bank materials, including spacers and miscellaneous components.2. Include duct, conduits, and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings,

and solvent cement.





3. Include accessories for manholes, handholes, boxes, and other utility structures.4. Include underground-line warning tape.5. Include warning planks.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures:

a. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories.

b. Include duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.c. Include reinforcement details.d. Include frame and cover design and manhole chimneys.e. Include details.f. Include grounding details.g. Include dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and

sumps.h. Include joint details.

2. Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete:

a. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details.

b. Include duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.c. Include cover design.d. Include grounding details.e. Include dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons.


A. Duct and Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures.

1. Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion fittings.

2. Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency responsible for testing nonconcrete handholes and boxes.

C. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete handholes, as required by ASTM C 858.

D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.






A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions, and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission.

B. Ground Water: Assume ground-water level is at grade level unless a lower water table is noted on Drawings.

C. Ground Water: Assume ground-water level is 36 inches (900 mm) below ground surface unless a higher water table is noted on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

B. Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated GRC.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum.

C. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 RIGID NONMETALLIC DUCT

A. Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: Type EPC-40-PVC RNC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651, with matching fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 by same manufacturer as duct.

B. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.

2.3 FLEXIBLE NONMETALLIC DUCTS

A. HDPE Duct: Type EPEC-40 HDPE, complying with NEMA TC 7 and UL 651A.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, and marked for intended location and application.





2.4 DUCT ACCESSORIES

A. Duct Spacers: Factory-fabricated, rigid, PVC interlocking spacers; sized for type and size of duct with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacing indicated while supporting duct during concreting or backfilling.

B. Underground-Line Warning Tape: Comply with requirements for underground-line warning tape specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Concrete Warning Planks: Nominal 12 by 24 by 3 inches (300 by 600 by 75 mm) in size, manufactured from 6000-psi (41-MPa) concrete.

1. Color: Red dye added to concrete during batching.2. Mark each plank with "ELECTRIC" in 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) deep

letters.

2.5 PRECAST CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, reinforced-concrete, monolithically poured walls and bottom unless open-bottom enclosures are indicated. Frame and cover shall form top of enclosure and shall have load rating consistent with that of handhole or box.

B. Comply with ASTM C 858 for design and manufacturing processes.

C. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof cast-iron frame, with cast-iron cover with recessed cover hook eyes and tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts.

D. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

E. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC”.

F. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom unless otherwise indicated.

G. Extensions and Slabs: Designed to mate with bottom of enclosure. Same material as enclosure.

1. Extension shall provide increased depth of 12 inches (300 mm.2. Slab: Same dimensions as bottom of enclosure, and arranged to provide closure.

H. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground-water level at grade.

I. Knockout Panels: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching duct, plus an additional 12 inches (300 mm) vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations.

1. Center window location.2. Knockout panels shall be located no less than 6 inches (150 mm) from interior surfaces

of walls, floors, or frames and covers of handholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls.

3. Knockout panel opening shall have cast-in-place, welded-wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct.

4. Knockout panels shall be framed with at least two additional No. 3 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.

5. Knockout panels shall be 1-1/2 to 2 inches (38 to 50 mm) thick.





J. Duct Entrances in Handhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each entering duct.

1. Type and size shall match fittings to duct to be terminated.2. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching duct and be located near interior

corners of handholes to facilitate racking of cable.

K. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long (300 mm wide by 600 mm long and larger shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.6 POLYMER CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND BOXES WITH POLYMER CONCRETE COVER

A. Description: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.

B. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. Comply with tier requirements in "Underground Enclosure Application" Article.

C. Color: Gray.

D. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom unless otherwise indicated.

E. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure.

F. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

G. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC."

H. Direct-Buried Wiring Entrance Provisions: Knockouts equipped with insulated bushings or end-bell fittings, selected to suit box material, sized for wiring indicated, and arranged for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

I. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering duct for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

J. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long (300 mm wide by 600 mm long) and larger shall have factory-installed inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons.


A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037.

B. Nonconcrete Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of manholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency.2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by an independent testing agency

or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification, complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of duct, duct bank, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field. Notify Architect if there is a conflict between areas of excavation and existing structures or archaeological sites to remain.

B. Coordinate elevations of duct and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of duct and duct banks, as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct and duct bank will drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by Architect.

C. Clear and grub vegetation to be removed, and protect vegetation to remain according to Section 311000 "Site Clearing." Remove and stockpile topsoil for reapplication according to Section 311000 "Site Clearing."

3.2 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION

A. Duct for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: Type EPC-40-PVC RNC, concrete-encased unless otherwise indicated.

B. Duct for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: Type EPC-40-PVC RNC, direct-buried unless otherwise indicated.

C. Duct for Electrical Branch Circuits: Type EPC-40-PVC RNC, direct-buried unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stub-ups: Concrete-encased GRC.

3.3 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION

A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less:

1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.

2. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.

3. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-10 structural load rating.

4. Cover design load shall not exceed the design load of the handhole or box.

3.4 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Section 312000 "Earth Moving," but do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

B. Restoration: Replace area immediately after backfilling is completed.





C. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation, and re-establish original grades unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.

D. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Comply with Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" and Section 329300 "Plants."

E. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground duct, duct bank, and underground structures according to "Cutting and Patching" Article in Section 017300 "Execution."

3.5 DUCT AND DUCT-BANK INSTALLATION

A. Where indicated on Drawings, install duct, spacers, and accessories into the duct-bank configuration shown. Duct installation requirements in this Section also apply to duct bank.

B. Install duct according to NEMA TCB 2.

C. Slope: Pitch duct a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope duct from a high point between two manholes, to drain in both directions.

D. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches (1200 mm), both horizontally and vertically, at other locations unless otherwise indicated.

1. Duct shall have maximum of two 90 degree bends or the total of all bends shall be no more 180 degrees between pull points.

E. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in duct and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent duct do not lie in same plane.

F. End Bell Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches (250 mm) o.c. for 5-inch (125-mm) duct, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.

1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet (3 m) from the end bell, without reducing duct slope and without forming a trap in the line.

2. Expansion and Deflection Fittings: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each duct in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. Install an expansion fitting near the center of all straight line direct-buried duct with calculated expansion of more than 3/4 inch (19 mm).

3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.

G. Terminator Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use manufactured, cast-in-place duct terminators, with entrances into structure spaced approximately 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. for 4-inch (100-mm) duct, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.

1. Begin change from regular spacing to terminator spacing 10 feet (3 m) from the terminator, without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.

2. Expansion and Deflection Fittings: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each duct in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. Install an expansion fitting near the center of all straight line duct with calculated expansion of more than 3/4 inch (19 mm).





H. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of duct with pulled cables. Seal spare duct at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig (1.03-MPa) hydrostatic pressure.

I. Pulling Cord: Install 200-lbf- (1000-N-) test nylon cord in empty ducts.

J. Direct-Buried Duct and Duct Bank:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for preparation of trench bottoms for pipes less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.

2. Width: Excavate trench 12 inches (300 mm) wider than duct on each side.3. Width: Excavate trench 3 inches (75 mm) wider than duct on each side.4. Depth: Install top of duct at least 36 inches (900 mm) below finished grade unless

otherwise indicated.5. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below frost line.6. Support ducts on duct spacers coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor

temperature.7. Spacer Installation: Place spacers close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of

duct, with not less than four spacers per 20 feet (6 m) of duct. Place spacers within 24 inches (600 mm) of duct ends. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches (150 mm) between tiers. Secure spacers to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

8. Install duct with a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts for like services and 6 inches (150 mm) between power and communications duct.

9. Elbows: Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups, at building entrances, and at changes of direction in duct direction unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.

10. Install manufactured GRC elbows for stub-ups, at building entrances, and at changes of direction in duct.a. Couple RNC duct to GRC with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.b. Stub-ups to Outdoor Equipment: Extend concrete-encased GRC horizontally a

minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.1) Stub-ups shall be minimum 4 inches (100 mm) above finished floor and

minimum 3 inches (75 mm)from conduit side to edge of slab.c. Stub-ups to Indoor Equipment: Extend concrete-encased GRC horizontally a

minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of wall. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.1) Stub-ups shall be minimum 4 inches (100 mm) above finished floor and no

less than 3 inches (75 mm)from conduit side to edge of slab.

11. After installing first tier of duct, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing each tier. After placing last tier, hand place backfill to 4 inches (100 mm) over duct and hand tamp. Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for installation of backfill materials.

a. Place minimum 3 inches (75 mm) of sand as a bed for duct. Place sand to a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) above top level of duct.

b. Place minimum 6 inches (150 mm) of engineered fill above concrete encasement of duct.





K. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above direct-buried duct, placing them 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of duct or duct bank. Provide an additional plank for each 12-inch (300-mm) increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional planks 12 inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally.

L. Underground-Line Warning Tape: Bury nonconducting underground line specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" no less than 12 inches (300 mm) above all concrete-encased duct and duct banks and approximately 12 inches (300 mm) below grade. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches (75 mm) of centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch (300-mm) increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional tapes 12 inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES

A. Precast Concrete Handhole and Manhole Installation:

1. Comply with ASTM C 891 unless otherwise indicated.2. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting

duct, to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel,

graded from 1-inch (25-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

B. Elevations:

1. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, <Insert depth of frost line below grade at Project site> below grade.

2. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.

3. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure.

C. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors in Manholes and Concrete Handholes: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches (97 mm) for manholes and 2 inches (50 mm) for handholes, for anchor bolts installed in the field. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting duct, to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of duct, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set cover flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.

D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below frost line, <Insert depth of frost line below grade at Project site> below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.





Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field cut openings for duct according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

G. For enclosures installed in brick/stone pavers and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavy-vehicle loading, form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and with top surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted earth.

1. Concrete: 3000 psi (20 kPa), 28-day strength, complying with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete," with a troweled finish.

2. Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep (250 mm wide by 300 mm deep).

3.8 GROUNDING

A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."



1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground duct, duct bank, and utility structures.

2. Pull solid aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and adequate bend radii, and test for out-of-round duct. Provide a minimum 12-inch- (300-mm-) long mandrel equal to duct size minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.

3. Test handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.


3.10 CLEANING

A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of duct until duct cleaner indicates that duct is clear of dirt and debris. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.

B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump.

1. Sweep floor, removing dirt and debris.2. Remove foreign material.





IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 260553 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Identification for conductors.2. Underground-line warning tape.3. Warning labels and signs.4. Equipment identification labels.5. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.





2.2 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE, Inscriptions for

Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.

2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: With white letters on a dark-gray or black background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch .

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

D. Plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

E. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches overall.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30A, and 120V to ground: Install labels at 10-foot maximum intervals.





B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Emergency Power.2. Power.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown.2) Phase B: Orange.3) Phase C: Yellow.

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

D. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

E. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

F. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

G. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, control panels, control stations, terminal





cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.c. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.



LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES; SECTION 26 09 23Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Time switches.2. Photoelectric switches.3. Standalone daylight-harvesting switching and dimming controls.4. Lighting contactors.


1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, non-networkable wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show installation details for the following:

a. Occupancy sensors.b. Vacancy sensors.

2. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and elevations, drawn to scale and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Sample warranty.





B. Software and firmware operational documentation.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace lighting control devices that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES

A. Electromechanical-Dial Time Switches: Comply with UL 917.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Contact Configuration: [SPST] [DPST] [SPDT] [DPDT].3. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-V ac.4. Circuitry: Allows connection of a photoelectric relay as a substitute for the on-off function

of a program.5. Astronomic time dial.6. Eight-Day Program: Uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays.7. Skip-a-day mode.8. Wound-spring reserve carryover mechanism to keep time during power failures, minimum

of 16 hours.

2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES

A. Description: Solid state, with [SPST] [DPST] dry contacts rated for 1000 W incandescent or 1800 VA inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A, and compatible with ballasts and LED lamps.


2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc (16.14 to 108 lux), with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of the photocell to prevent fixed light sources from causing turn-off.

3. Time Delay: Fifteen-second minimum, to prevent false operation.4. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor.5. Mounting: Twist lock complies with NEMA C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or

stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure.

6. Failure Mode: Luminaire stays ON.



B. Description: Solid state; one set of NO dry contacts rated for 24 V ac at 1 A, to operate connected load, complying with UL 773, and compatible with power pack and lighting control panelboard.


2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc (16.14 to 108 lux), with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.

3. Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation.4. Mounting: 1/2-inch (13-mm) threaded male conduit.5. Failure Mode: Luminaire stays ON.6. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast or LED load at 120- and 277-V ac, for

13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

a. LED status lights to indicate load status.b. Plenum rated.

2.3 LIGHTING CONTACTORS

A. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination-type lighting contactors with nonfused disconnect, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.

1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less THD of normal load current).

2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation.

3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, matching the NEMA

type specified for the enclosure.

2.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 22 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 16 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION




B. Examine lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

D. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90-percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-borne vibration unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch (13 mm).

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.




3.5 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two years.

B. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software.

1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule and access the system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.







PANELBOARDS; SECTION 26 24 16 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.

E. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.





1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.

4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate

at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.4. General Electric





B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker and Lugs only.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:


B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker and main lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:


B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.





c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on position.

2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

G. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

I. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."





D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.









WIRING DEVICES; SECTION 26 27 26Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill Page 1 of 6

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.2. Wall-box motion sensors.3. Snap switches.4. Communications outlets.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for pre-marking wall plates.

C. Submittals: Submittal data shall be clearly marked/highlighted indicating catalog number, product, materials or devices being used for this project.

D. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

F. All wiring devices shall be of one manufacturer listed in Part 2- Products.








PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 5352 (duplex).b. Hubbell; CR5352 (duplex).c. Leviton; 5352 (duplex).d. Pass & Seymour; 5352 (duplex).

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, non-feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Cooper; GF20.b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.c. Hubbell, GF5362

2.4 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:a. As listed on the Drawings






a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way).b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four way).c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way).d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4 (four way).

2.5 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS

A. Telephone Outlet:

1. Furnish and installed by owners vendor.

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Stainless steel to match plate finish.2. Material for Finished Spaces: satin-finished stainless steel, 0.04-inch- thick

B. Damp and Wet-Location, Weatherproof Covers: complying with type N.E.C. 406.8(B) weather-resistant thermoplastic cover. As manufactured by Intermatic, Model No. WP1100C.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Black, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.





C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the

manufacturer.7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

F. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout

or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.





6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as specified above.









FUSES; SECTION 26 28 13 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 2

SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in safety switches.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Operation and maintenance data.



B. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.2. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.3. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.




FUSES; SECTION 26 28 13 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 2 of 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1 and Class RK5, time delay.

INSTALLATION

B. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block and holder.





ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS; SECTION 26 28 16 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches.2. Nonfusible switches.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, accessory, and component indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Operation and maintenance data.








PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.4. General Electric.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 and 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 and 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.





B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Enclosed switches will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.









EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING; SECTION 26 52 19Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 3

SECTION 265219 - EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Luminaire supports: Inverter Unit

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Emergency Lighting Unit: A lighting unit with integral or remote emergency battery powered supply and the means for controlling and charging the battery and unit operation.

D. Fixture: See "Luminaire" Paragraph.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of emergency lighting unit, and emergency lighting support, arranged by designation.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of inverters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING


B. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.

C. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more lamps, remote mounted from luminaire.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one LED lamps continuously. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and to pole luminaires.

2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead calcium type.4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.5. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure listed for installation remote from luminaire.

Remote assembly shall be located no less than half the distance recommended by the emergency power unit manufacturer, whichever is less.

6. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

7. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

8. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

B. Housings:

1. Extruded aluminum housing.2. Finish: Powder coat.

C. Conduit: Flexible metallic conduit, minimum 3/4 inch in diameter.

2.3 METAL FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for emergency power unit weight.2. Able to maintain luminaire position when testing emergency power unit.



1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.






LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS; SECTION 26 56 13Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6

SECTION 265613 - LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Poles and accessories for support of luminaires.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPA: Equivalent projected area.

B. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture.

C. Pole: Luminaire-supporting structure.

D. Standard: See "Pole."


A. Product Data: For each pole, accessory, and luminaire-supporting and -lowering device.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Detail fabrication and assembly of poles and pole accessories.4. Foundation construction details, including pole base, material descriptions, dimensions,

anchor bolts, support devices, and calculations, signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state of Virginia.

5. Anchor bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.6. Method and procedure of pole installation. Include manufacturer's written installations.


A. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that products are designed for indicated load requirements according to AASHTO LTS-6-M and that load imposed by luminaire, cable catenary system and attachments has been included in design. The certification shall be based on design calculations signed and sealed by a professional engineer.





B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For poles, brackets, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

C. Material test reports.


E. Sample warranty.

F. Soil test reports.

G. Street lights shall be pre-approved by the City of Richmond Department of Public Utilities (DPU) and their street light standards prior to shop drawing submission


A. Operation and maintenance data for pole-lowering devices and pole-mounted accessories.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of pole(s) that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within a specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs from special warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion or as approved by City of Richmond DPU.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design pole foundation and pole power system.

B. Seismic Performance: Foundation and pole shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the system will be fully

operational after the seismic event."2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.

C. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-6-M.

D. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, and supporting structure, applied according to AASHTO LTS-6-M.

E. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf distributed according to AASHTO LTS-6-M.





F. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft. applied according to AASHTO LTS-6-M for applicable areas on the Ice Load Map.

G. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole, luminaire, cable catenary system and attachments calculated and applied according to AASHTO LTS-6-M.

1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet high or less is 100 mph

a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0.b. Minimum Design Life: 25 years.c. Velocity Conversion Factor: 1.0.

H. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual EPA of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the EPA to be used in pole selection strength analysis.

I. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 ALUMINUM POLES

A. Manufacturer: As specified in lighting schedule, or on drawings; match existing street light poles.

B. Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6, with access handhole in pole wall.

C. Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6061-T6, with access handhole in in pole wall.

1. Shape: Round, tapered. Match existing.2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway

support.

D. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and securely fastened to pole top.

E. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Bolted 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.

F. Fasteners: stainless steel size and type as determined by manufacturer. Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components.

1. Materials: Compatible with poles and standards as well as to substrates to which poles and standards are fastened and shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.

2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication unless otherwise indicated.

G. Removable access door: match existing. Secured by stainless-steel captive screws.

H. Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

I. Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Match existing.






1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20 requirements; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.

3. Class I, Clear-Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: Medium satin; Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I clear coating of 0.018 mm or thicker), complying with AAMA 611.

J. Powder-Coat Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair powder coat bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, according to SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 or SSPC-SP 8.

2. Powder coat shall comply with AAMA 2604.

a. Electrostatic applied powder coating; single application with a minimum 2.5- to 3.5-mils dry film thickness; cured according to manufacturer's instructions. Coat interior and exterior of pole for equal corrosion protection.

b. Color: Black; match existing.

2.3 POLE ACCESSORIES

A. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, finished same as pole, and arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and nuts.

B. Transformer-Type Base: Same material and color as pole. Coordinate dimensions to suit pole's base flange and to accept indicated accessories. Include removable flanged access cover secured with bolts or screws.

2.4 MOUNTING HARDWARE

A. Anchor Bolts: Manufactured to ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, with a minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi.

1. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class C.

B. Nuts: ASTM A 563, Grade A, Heavy-Hex

1. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class C

C. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1.

1. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class C

2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.





B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 POLE FOUNDATION

A. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Structural steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123 M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole-base flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Anchor Bolts: Install plumb using manufacturer-supplied template, uniformly spaced.

3.2 POLE INSTALLATION

A. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts and tighten top nuts to torque level according to pole manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete-Paved Areas: Install poles with a minimum 6-inch- wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of the adjacent concrete slab. Fill unpaved ring with pea gravel. Insert material to a level 1 inch below top of concrete slab.

D. Raise and set pole using web fabric slings (not chain or cable) at locations indicated by manufacturer.

3.3 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum using insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50-percent overlap.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground Metal Poles and Support Structures: Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole unless otherwise indicated.2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding

system.





B. Ground Nonmetallic Poles and Support Structures: Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole.2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector.3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundation.





LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 265619 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6

SECTION 265619 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior solid-state luminaires that are designed for and exclusively use LED lamp technology.

2. Luminaire supports.3. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 265613 "Lighting Poles and Standards" for poles and standards used to support

exterior lighting equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color rendering index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of luminaire.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For luminaire supports.





1. Include design calculations for luminaire supports and seismic restraints.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale and coordinated.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of the following:

1. Luminaire.2. Photoelectric relay.3. Dimming component.

D. Sample warranty.



1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project. Use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.2. Provide a list of all photoelectric relay types used on Project; use manufacturers' codes.3. Provide owner’s manual for lighting controls, dimming and associated equipment /

devices.4. Provide on-site testing and training of City of Richmond personnel.


A. Mark locations of exterior luminaires for approval by Architect prior to the start of luminaire installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 2 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

B. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock resistant.





1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event."

2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS


B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL.

C. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and listed for wet location.

E. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61.

F. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 4000 K. Coordinate exact color temperature with City of Richmond prior to shop drawing submission.

G. L70 lamp life of 50,000 hours.

H. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.

I. Nominal Operating Voltage: 208 V ac and 120 V ac. Match City of Richmond’s street light voltage; coordinate with City of Richmond DPU.

J. In-line Fusing: On the primary for each luminaire.

K. Lamp Rating: Lamp marked for outdoor use and in enclosed locations.

L. Source Limitations: Obtain luminaires from single source from a single manufacturer per type.

M. Source Limitations: For luminaires, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of luminaire from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

2.3 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Area and Site:

1. Manufacturer: As specified in lighting schedule, or on drawings.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.





C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses.

D. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.

E. Lens and Refractor Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

G. Housings:

1. Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosure that will not warp, sag, or deform in use.

2. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Variations in Finishes: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

B. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.

C. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

D. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 or SSPC-SP 8.

2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

a. Color: As specified in lighting schedule, or on drawings.





2.6 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS


B. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Fasten luminaire to structural support.

E. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.3. Support luminaires without causing deflection of finished surface.4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.5. Provide weatherproof junction boxes and mounting supports as required.

F. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways. Conceal raceways and cables.

G. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with finished grade unless otherwise indicated.

H. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with other construction.

I. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoring a north orientation.

J. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" and 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for wiring connections and wiring methods.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTED LUMINAIRES

A. Aim as indicated on Drawings.

B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location. Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate exact installation method with Civil Engineer prior to shop drawing submission.





3.3 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- (0.254-mm-) thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.3. Exterior fixtures shall be controlled via a central lighting control system(s). pole mounted

flood lights shall be supported by a 5 KVA lighting inverter for a minimum of 90 run minutes upon loss of utility power. Coordinate all wiring and equipment / devices with lighting manufacturer and silva cell installation as to not cut the cells.

C. Illumination Tests:

1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IES testing guide(s):a. IES LM-5.b. IES LM-50.c. IES LM-52.d. IES LM-64.e. IES LM-72.

2. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

D. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaires and photocell relays.


DIVISION 31


SITE CLEARING; SECTION 31 10 00Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4Copyright 2016 TIMMONS GROUP

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.2. Disconnecting, capping or sealing storm and sanitary sewer pipe.3. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control.


1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms.

B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil," but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

C. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the City’s property.

D. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the City’s property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents of containers and deliver to City’s designated storage area.

E. Existing to Remain: Protect items indicated to remain against damage and soiling. When permitted by the City, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations.


A. Schedule a pre-installation meeting with the Owner, City Inspectors, and design team at least 72 hours prior to the start of work.



1.5 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled, salvaged or otherwise remain the City’s property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.


A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or video recordings.2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions.

B. Stockpiling program.

C. Schedule of site demolition activities indicating the following:1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending

dates for each activity.2. Interruption of utility services. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

D.

E. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.

F. Landfill records indicating receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.

G. Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged or turned over to the City.


A. Stockpiling Program: Prepare a written program to systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow procedures and handle materials and equipment during the Work. Include dimensioned diagrams for placement and protection of stockpiles.

1.8 Notify the City prior to start of work and obtain all necessary permits for this work at the contractor’s expense. FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from the City and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed trafficways if required by the City or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining the City’s property will be obtained by the City before award of Contract.



1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by the City.

C. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store at the City’s designated storage area.

D. Utility Locator Service: Notify ”Miss Utility” at 1-800-552-7001 at least 48 hours prior to construction.

E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures are in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.

B. Antirust Coating: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, self-curing, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 zinc-rich coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to the City.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls, and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.



3.3 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. The City will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor.

1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.

B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.2. The City will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

C. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the City or others, unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify the City not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without the City’s written permission.

D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

3.4 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove concrete, paving, granite and concrete curbs, cobblestone, brick pavers and aggregate base as indicated. Remove canopy roof and lumber supports as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line of existing pavement and concrete to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain with two coats of antirust coating, following coating manufacturer's written instructions. Keep paint off surfaces that will remain exposed.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off the City’s property.

B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials, and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.



EARTH MOVING; SECTION 31 20 00Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 15Copyright 2016 TIMMONS GROUP

SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Excavating and filling for rough grading the Site.2. Preparing subgrades for granite and brick pavers. 3. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.4. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade.5. Subbase course for concrete walks.6. Subsurface drainage backfill for trenches.7. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.


1. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for stripping and stockpiling and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

2. Section 312319 "Dewatering" for lowering and disposing of ground water during construction.

3. Section 329300 "Plants" for finish grading in planting areas and tree and shrub pit excavation and planting.

1.3 UNIT PRICES

A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices for earth moving specified in Section 012200 "Unit Prices."

B. Quantity allowances for earth moving are included in Section 012100 "Allowances."

C. Rock Measurement: Volume of rock actually removed, measured in original position, but not to exceed the following. Unit prices for rock excavation include replacement with approved materials.

1. 24 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms other than at footings.2. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings.3. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against

grade.4. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade.5. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches (600 mm)

wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide.



1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Engineer. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions.

2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and more than 30 feet (9 m) in length.

3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Engineer, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock-excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted:

1. Equipment for Footing, Trench, and Pit Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- (1065-mm-) maximum-width, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp (103-kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,700 lbf (128 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,400 lbf (82 kN) with extra-long reach boom.

2. Equipment for Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 230-hp (172-kW) flywheel power and developing a minimum of 47,992-lbf (213.3-kN) breakout force with a general-purpose bare bucket.

I. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches (97 blows/50 mm) when tested by a geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586.

J. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.



K. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

L. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

M. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services within buildings.


A. Schedule a pre-instillation meeting with the Owner, City Inspectors, and Design Team at least 72 hours prior to the start of work.

1. Review methods and procedures related to earthmoving, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Personnel and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays.b. Coordination of Work with utility locator service.c. Extent of trenching by hand or with air spade.d. Field quality control.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:

1. Geotextiles.2. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture.3. Geofoam.4. Warning tapes.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Material Test Reports: For all soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487.2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698.

C.

D. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth-moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.


A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated.




A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth-moving operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from the City and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by the City or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earth moving indicated on property adjoining the City’s property will be obtained by the City before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by the City.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify “Miss Utility” at 1-800-552-7001 at least 48 hours prior to construction.

D. Do not commence earth-moving operations until temporary site fencing and erosion- and sedimentation-control measures specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls” and] [Section 311000 "Site Clearing” are in place.

E. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.2. Parking vehicles or equipment.3. Foot traffic.4. Erection of sheds or structures.5. Impoundment of water.6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

F. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.

G. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification (Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487; Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3 according to AASHTO M 145), or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification (Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487: Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7 according to AASHTO M 145), or a combination of these groups.



1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 294/D 2940M 0; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve.

J. Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M; fine aggregate.

K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 GEOTEXTILES

A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.2. Survivability: As follows:

a. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 lbf (700 N); ASTM D 4632.b. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 lbf (630 N); ASTM D 4632.c. Tear Strength: 56 lbf (250 N); ASTM D 4533.d. Puncture Strength: 56 lbf (250 N); ASTM D 4833.

3. Apparent Opening Size: [No. 40 (0.425-mm)] [No. 60 (0.250-mm)] [No. 70 (0.212-mm)] sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.

4. Permittivity: 0.2 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.5. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

B. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:



1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.2. Survivability: As follows:

a. Grab Tensile Strength: 247 lbf (1100 N); ASTM D 4632.b. Sewn Seam Strength: 222 lbf (990 N); ASTM D 4632.c. Tear Strength: 90 lbf (400 N); ASTM D 4533.d. Puncture Strength: 90 lbf (400 N); ASTM D 4833.

3. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.250-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.4. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.5. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

2.3 CONTROLLED LOW-STRENGTH MATERIAL

A. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Self-compacting, low-density, flowable concrete material produced from the following:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type II or Type III.2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.3. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M, 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum

aggregate size.4. Foaming Agent: ASTM C 869/C 869M.5. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.6. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

B. Produce low-density, controlled low-strength material with the following physical properties:

1. As-Cast Unit Weight: 30 to 36 lb/cu. ft. (480 to 576 kg/cu. m) at point of placement, when tested according to ASTM C 138/C 138M.

2. Compressive Strength: 80 psi (550 kPa) when tested according to ASTM C 495/C 495M.

C. Produce conventional-weight, controlled low-strength material with 80-psi (550-kPa) compressive strength when tested according to ASTM C 495/C 495M.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric.2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.4. Blue: Water systems.5. Green: Sewer systems.

B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric.2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.



3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.4. Blue: Water systems.5. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth-moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions:

a. 24 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms other than at footings.b. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings.c. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast

against grade.d. 6 inches (150 mm) bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade.



e. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches and the greater of 24 inches (600 mm)] wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide.

B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned by Engineer. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock excavation according to unit prices included in the Contract Documents. Changes in the Contract Time may be authorized for rock excavation.

1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; and soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.

a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.

2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions:

a. 24 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms other than at footings.b. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings.c. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast

against grade.d. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade.

e. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches and the greater of 24 inches (600

mm) wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps.

3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.



1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit as indicated.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.

1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe or conduit circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill.

3. For flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

4. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches (100 mm) deeper than bottom of pipe and conduit elevations to allow for bedding course. Hand-excavate deeper for bells of pipe.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. If Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Proof-roll subgrade below the pavers with a pneumatic-tired and loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes) identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions .

E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Engineer, without additional compensation.



3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when approved by Engineer.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Engineer.

3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.11 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.4. Removing concrete formwork.5. Removing trash and debris.6. Removing temporary shoring, bracing, and sheeting.7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches (750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course. Concrete is specified in Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

E. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.



F. Initial Backfill:

1. Soil Backfill: Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit.

a. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

2. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength material to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

G. Final Backfill:

1. Soil Backfill: Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

2. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled low-strength material to final subgrade elevation.

H. Warning Tape: Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.13 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.



3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent.

3.16 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to elevations required to achieve indicated finish elevations, within the following subgrade tolerances:

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of [1/2 inch (13 mm)] when tested with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.

3.17 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE

A. Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Section 334600 "Subdrainage."

B. Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench. Place a 6-inch (150-mm) course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of filter material, placed in compacted layers 6 inches (150 mm) thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.



C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches (300 mm) of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches (150 mm) thick. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inch- (150-mm-) thick compacted layers to final subgrade.

3.18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVERS

A. Place subbase course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement.3. Shape subbase course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.4. Place subbase course6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.5. Place subbase course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers

of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

6. Compact subbase course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

3.19 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows:

1. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place drainage course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.

3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.




A. Special Inspections: The City will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements.

2. Determine that fill material classification and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements.

3. Determine, during placement and compaction, that in-place density of compacted fill complies with requirements.

B. Testing Agency: The City will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Engineer.

E. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2937, and ASTM D 6938, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:

1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab but in no case fewer than three tests.

2. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for every 150 feet (46 m) or less of trench length but no fewer than two tests.

F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.21 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Engineer; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.



3.22 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off the City’s property.

B. Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on the City’s property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Engineer.

1. Remove waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off the City’s property.



DEWATERING; SECTION 31 23 19Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4Copyright 2016 TIMMONS GROUP

SECTION 312319 - DEWATERING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes construction dewatering.


1. Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for recording preexisting conditions and dewatering system progress.

2. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, backfilling, site grading, and controlling surface-water runoff and ponding.

3. Section 334600 "Subdrainage" for permanent foundation wall, underfloor, and footing drainage.


A. Schedule a pre-installation meeting with the Owner, City Inspectors, and Design Team at least 72 hours prior to start of work.

1. Verify availability of Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review condition of site to be dewatered including coordination with temporary erosion-control measures and temporary controls and protections.

3. Review geotechnical report.4. Review proposed site clearing and excavations.5. Review existing utilities and subsurface conditions.6. Review observation and monitoring of dewatering system.


A. Shop Drawings: For dewatering system, prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.2. Show arrangement, locations, and details of wells and well points; locations of risers,

headers, filters, pumps, power units, and discharge lines; and means of discharge, control of sediment, and disposal of water.

3. Include layouts of piezometers and flow-measuring devices for monitoring performance of dewatering system.

4. Include written plan for dewatering operations including sequence of well and well-point placement coordinated with excavation shoring and bracings and control procedures to be adopted if dewatering problems arise.




A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Existing Conditions: Using photographs or video recordings, show existing conditions of adjacent construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by dewatering operations. Submit before Work begins.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in dewatering work.


A. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of a geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by a geotechnical engineer. The City is not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data.

1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for dewatering according to the performance requirements.

2. The geotechnical report is referenced elsewhere in Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control hydrostatic pressures and to lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water and permit excavation and construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades.

1. Design dewatering system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

2. Continuously monitor and maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and constructed slopes, prevention of flooding in excavation, and prevention of damage to subgrades and permanent structures.

3. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.4. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site

improvements adjacent to excavation.5. Remove dewatering system when no longer required for construction.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning dewatering. Comply with water- and debris-disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering operations.

1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site or surrounding area.

2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation.

B. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from The City and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Provide temporary grading to facilitate dewatering and control of surface water.

D. Protect and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls," and Section 311000 "Site Clearing," during dewatering operations.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal, and surface-water controls.

1. Space well points or wells at intervals required to provide sufficient dewatering.2. Use filters or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface.

B. Place dewatering system into operation to lower water to specified levels before excavating below ground-water level.

C. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails.

3.3 OPERATION

A. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill materials have been placed or until dewatering is no longer required.

B. Operate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Drain water-bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.



1. Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade softening, and slope instability.

2. Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.

3. Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of [24 inches (600 mm)] below bottom of excavation.

C. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water and sediment in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others.

D. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches (900 mm) below overlying construction.


A. Observation Wells: Provide observation wells or piezometers, take measurements, and maintain at least the minimum number indicated; additional observation wells may be required by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Observe and record daily elevation of ground water and piezometric water levels in observation wells.

2. Repair or replace, within 24 hours, observation wells that become inactive, damaged, or destroyed. In areas where observation wells are not functioning properly, suspend construction activities until reliable observations can be made. Add or remove water from observation-well risers to demonstrate that observation wells are functioning properly.

3. Fill observation wells, remove piezometers, and fill holes when dewatering is completed.

B. Survey-Work Benchmarks: Resurvey benchmarks [regularly] [monthly] <Insert time period> during dewatering and maintain an accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction.

C. Provide continual observation to ensure that subsurface soils are not being removed by the dewatering operation.

D. Prepare reports of observations.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect and maintain dewatering system during dewatering operations.

B. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering.



EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION; SECTION 31 50 00Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 5Copyright 2016 TIMMONS GROUP

SECTION 315000 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems.


1. Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for recording preexisting conditions and excavation support and protection system progress.

2. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating and backfilling and for controlling surface-water runoff and ponding.

3. Section 312319 "Dewatering" for dewatering excavations.


A. Schedule a pre-installation meeting with the Owner, City Inspectors, and Design Team at least 72 hours prior to the start of work.

1. Review geotechnical report.2. Review existing utilities and subsurface conditions.3. Review coordination for interruption, shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.4. Review proposed excavations.5. Review proposed equipment.6. Review monitoring of excavation support and protection system.7. Review coordination with waterproofing.8. Review abandonment or removal of excavation support and protection system.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, performance properties, and dimensions of individual components and profiles, and calculations for excavation support and protection system.

B. Shop Drawings: For excavation support and protection system, prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.2. Show arrangement, locations, and details of soldier piles, piling, lagging, tiebacks,

bracing, and other components of excavation support and protection system according to engineering design.



3. Indicate type and location of waterproofing.4. Include a written plan for excavation support and protection, including sequence of

construction of support and protection coordinated with progress of excavation.


A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor and professional engineer.

B. Contractor Calculations: For excavation support and protection system. Include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Existing Conditions: Using photographs or video recordings, show existing conditions of adjacent construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by inadequate performance of excavation support and protection systems. Submit before Work begins.

D. Record Drawings: Identify locations and depths of capped utilities, abandoned-in-place support and protection systems, and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions.


A. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities occupied by the City or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify the City no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of utility.2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without the City’s and utility owner’s written

permission.

B. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of a geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by a geotechnical engineer. The City is not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from the data.

1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for excavation support and protection according to the performance requirements.

2. The geotechnical report is referenced elsewhere in Project Manual.

C. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Provide, design,, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting earth and hydrostatic pressures and superimposed and construction loads.



1. Contractor Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.3. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings,

structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation.4. Continuously monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements to ensure stability of

excavations and constructed slopes and to ensure that damage to permanent structures is prevented.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition.

B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 690/A 690M, or ASTM A 992/A 992M.

C. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328/A 328M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, or ASTM A 690/A 690M; with continuous interlocks.

1. Corners: Site-fabricated mechanical interlock or Roll-formed corner shape with continuous interlock.

D. Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of size and strength required for applicationRetain "Shotcrete" Paragraph below if using shotcrete as lagging between soldier piles.

E. Shotcrete: Comply with Section 033713 "Shotcrete" for shotcrete materials and mixes, reinforcement, and shotcrete application.

F. Cast-in-Place Concrete: ACI 301, of compressive strength required for application.

G. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

H. Tiebacks: Steel bars, ASTM A 722/A 722M.

I. Tiebacks: Steel strand, ASTM A 416/A 416M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations.

1. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered.

B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from the City and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.



C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that construction and finishing of other work is not impeded.

3.2 SOLDIER PILES AND LAGGING

A. Install steel soldier piles before starting excavation. Extend soldier piles below excavation grade level to depths adequate to prevent lateral movement. Space soldier piles at regular intervals not to exceed allowable flexural strength of wood lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of flanges to vary not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment.

B. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as required to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact.

C. Install wales horizontally at locations indicated on Drawings and secure to soldier piles.

3.3 SHEET PILING

A. Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and tightly interlock vertical edges to form a continuous barrier.

B. Accurately place the piling, using templates and guide frames unless otherwise recommended in writing by the sheet piling manufacturer. Limit vertical offset of adjacent sheet piling to 60 inches (1500 mm). Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment.

C. Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation.

3.4 TIEBACKS

A. Drill, install, grout, and tension tiebacks.

B. Test load-carrying capacity of each tieback and replace and retest deficient tiebacks.

1. Have test loading observed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for design of excavation support and protection system.

C. Maintain tiebacks in place until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures.

3.5 BRACING

A. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work. If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing original brace.

1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work unless otherwise approved by Engineer.

2. Install internal bracing if required to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames.3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until

permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures.




A. Survey-Work Benchmarks: Resurvey benchmarks regularly during installation of excavation support and protection systems, excavation progress, and for as long as excavation remains open. Maintain an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction.

B. Promptly correct detected bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure that excavation support and protection system remains stable.

C. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installation or faulty performance of excavation support and protection systems.

3.7 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS

A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and earth and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils and rock or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities.

1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches (1200 mm) below overlying construction and abandon remainder.

2. Fill voids immediately with approved backfill compacted to density specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3. Repair or replace, as approved by Engineer, adjacent work damaged or displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems.

B. Leave excavation support and protection systems permanently in place.


DIVISION 32


CONCRETE PAVING; SECTION 32 13 13Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 14Copyright 2016 TIMMONS GROUP

SECTION 32 13 13 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes Concrete Paving. Including the following:

1. Curbs 2. Paver Concrete Base3. Handicap Ramps


1. Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete.

2. Section 32 13 73 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants in expansion and contraction joints within concrete paving and in joints between concrete paving and asphalt paving or adjacent construction.

3. Section 32 17 26 "Tactile Warning Surfacing" for detectable warning pavers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, and other pozzolans.



A. Schedule a pre-installation meeting with the Owner, City Inspectors, and Design Team at least 72 hours prior to the start of work.

B. Review methods and procedures related to concrete paving, including but not limited to, the following:

1. Concrete mixture design.a. Quality control of concrete materials and concrete paving construction practices.

C. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with concrete paving to attend, including the following:

1. Contractor's superintendent.a. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.



b. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.c. Concrete paving Subcontractor.d. Manufacturer's representative of stamped concrete paving system used for

stamped detectable warnings.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Provide certification that all materials meet VDOT standards for class of concrete required.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified ready-mix concrete manufacturer.

B. Material Test Reports: For each of the following:

1. Aggregates: Include service-record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity.a. Field quality-control reports.


A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

B. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist").


A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete paving mixtures.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

B. Cold-Weather Concrete Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following:

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.



2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.

C. Hot-Weather Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap, so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 and 3 sections for concrete materials, admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and other required.

2.2 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet or less. Do not use notched and bent forms.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.


A. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, fabricated from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.

B. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and bending; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars.

C. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars; zinc coated (galvanized) after fabrication according to ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I coating. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.



D. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, internally and externally threaded. Design hook-bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against paving form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt.

E. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780/A 780M.


A. Cementitious Materials: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, white portland cement Type I/II.

2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595/C 595M, Type IP, portland-pozzolan cement.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 4M, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service-record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar paving applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

1. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

E. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

B. Water: Potable.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:a. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems; MasterKure ER 50 (Pre-2014: Confilm.b. ChemMasters, Inc; Spray-Film.c. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm.d. W.R. Meadows, Inc; EVAPRE.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.










a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc; A-H Curing Compound #2 DR WB.b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; Kurez DR VOX.c. Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR.d. W.R. Meadows, Inc; 1100-CLEAR SERIES.


A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips.

B. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

D. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, two-component epoxy resin capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application temperature, of grade complying with requirements, and of the following types:

1. Types I and II, nonload bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

2.7 STAMPED DETECTABLE WARNING MATERIALS

A. Detectable Warning Stamp: Semirigid polyurethane mats with formed underside capable of imprinting detectable warning pattern on plastic concrete; perforated with a vent hole at each dome.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:a. ADA Solutions, Inc.b. Butterfield Color.c. Stampcrete International, Ltd.

2. Size of Stamp: One piece, matching detectable warning area shown on Drawings, or at a minimum 24 by 48 inches.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 and 3 sections for concrete mix design, sampling and testing, and quality control or VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications whichever is more stringent.

1. Design mix to produce normal-weight concrete consisting of Portland cement, aggregate, water-reducing or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer), air-entraining admixture, and water to produce the following properties:

2. Comply with the requirements of VDOT Std. Class A3 Concrete, unless otherwise indicated.





http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=5180

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457048396





B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:

1. Air Content: 5-1/2 percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent for 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

2. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent for 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

3. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph .

2. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons .

3. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch according to requirements in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.



3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.


A. General: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 and 3 sections of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded-wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Use galvanized-steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material.

F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M.

G. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap of adjacent mats.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated.3. Butt Joints: Use bonding agent at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against

hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.



4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.

5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet unless otherwise indicated.2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if

joint sealant is indicated.4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated.5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or

clip joint-filler sections together.6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other

temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows, to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes.a. Tolerance: Ensure that grooved joints are within 3 inches either way from centers

of dowels.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.a. Tolerance: Ensure that sawed joints are within 3 inches either way from centers of

dowels.

3. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.


A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast-in.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.



C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 and 3 sections for placing concrete or VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications whichever is more stringent.

E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

G. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement dowels and joint devices.

H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

J. Curbs and Gutters: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.

K. Slip-Form Paving: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce paving to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.

L. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of slip-form paving machine during operations.

3.7 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleedwater sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float-finished concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture.

2. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

3. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.



3.8 SPECIAL FINISHES

A. Monolithic Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Expose coarse aggregate in paving surface as follows:

1. Immediately after float finishing, spray-apply chemical surface retarder to paving according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Cover paving surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove when ready to continue finishing operations.

3. Without dislodging aggregate, remove mortar concealing the aggregate by lightly brushing surface with a stiff, nylon-bristle broom. Do not expose more than one-third of the average diameter of the aggregate and not more than one-half of the diameter of the smallest aggregate.

4. Fine-spray surface with water and brush. Repeat cycle of water flushing and brushing until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required.

B. Seeded Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Immediately after initial floating, spread a single layer of aggregate uniformly on paving surface. Tamp aggregate into plastic concrete and float finish to entirely embed aggregate with mortar cover of 1/16 inch .

1. Spray-apply chemical surface retarder to paving according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Cover paving surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove sheeting when ready to continue finishing operations.

3. Without dislodging aggregate, remove mortar concealing the aggregate by lightly brushing surface with a stiff, nylon-bristle broom. Do not expose more than one-third of the average diameter of the aggregate and not more than one-half of the diameter of the smallest aggregate.

4. Fine-spray surface with water and brush. Repeat cycle of water flushing and brushing until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required.

C. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, spread slip-resistive aggregate finish on paving surface according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft. of dampened, slip-resistive aggregate over paving surface in two applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface.

2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of slip-resistive aggregate over paving surface with mechanical spreader, allow to absorb moisture, and embed by power floating. Follow power floating with a second slip-resistive aggregate application, uniformly distributing remainder of material at right angles to first application to ensure uniform coverage, and embed by power floating.

3. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by slip-resistive aggregate manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing.

4. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel-wire brush or abrasive stone and water to expose nonslip aggregate.

D. Rock-Salt Finish: After initial brooming, uniformly spread rock salt over paving surface at the rate of 5 lb/100 sq. ft..

1. Embed rock salt into plastic concrete with roller.2. Cover paving surface with 1-mil- thick polyethylene sheet and remove sheet when

concrete has hardened and seven-day curing period has elapsed.3. After seven-day curing period, saturate concrete with water and broom-sweep surface to

dissolve remaining rock salt, thereby leaving pits and holes.



3.9 DETECTABLE WARNING INSTALLATION

A. Blockouts: Form blockouts in concrete for installation of detectable paving units specified in Section 32 17 26 "Tactile Warning Surfacing."

1. Tolerance for Opening Size: Plus 1/4 inch , no minus.

3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. If evaporation rate in "Evaporation Retarder" Paragraph below is exceeded, ACI 305R states that plastic shrinkage cracking is probable. See manufacturers' literature or ACI 305R for estimated moisture-loss chart that relates relative humidity, air and concrete temperature, and wind velocity to rate of evaporation.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

E. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

F. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture-retaining-cover curing as follows:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:a. Water.

1) Continuous water-fog spray.2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover,

placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches , and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears occurring during installation or curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.

3.11 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 3/4 inch .2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch , minus 1/4 inch .3. Surface: Gap below 10-feet- long; unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch .4. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/2 inch per 12

inches of tie bar.5. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch .6. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch .



7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch per 12 inches of dowel.

8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches .9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch , no minus.10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch , no minus.


A. Testing Agency: The City will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 5000 sq. ft. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests

for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when it is 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one specimen at seven days and two specimens at 28 days.a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two

specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.

C. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to the City, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by the City but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by the City.

G. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

I. Prepare test and inspection reports.


A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Drill test cores, where directed by City, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with Portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.





DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING; SECTION 32 13 16Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 10

SECTION 321316 - DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes colored, stamped and stained concrete paving.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete.2. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for cast-in-place concrete paving with other finishes,

curbs and gutters, and stamped detectable warnings.3. Section 321373 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants in expansion and

contraction joints within decorative concrete paving and in joints between decorative concrete paving and other paving or adjacent construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, and other pozzolans.




1. Review methods and procedures related to decorative concrete paving, including but not limited to, the following:a. Concrete mixture design.b. Quality control of concrete materials and decorative concrete paving construction

practices.

2. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with decorative concrete paving to attend, including the following:a. Contractor's superintendent.b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.d. Decorative concrete paving Installer.e. Manufacturer's representative of decorative concrete paving system.





B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed color, pattern, or texture indicated.

C. Design Mixtures: For each decorative concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:

1. Cementitious materials.2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.3. Fiber reinforcement.4. Admixtures.5. Curing compounds.6. Applied finish materials.7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive.8. Joint fillers.

C. Material Test Reports: For each of the following:

1. Aggregates. Include service-record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity.



A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer of decorative concrete paving systems.

B. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist").

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups of full-thickness sections of decorative concrete paving to demonstrate typical joints; surface color, pattern, and texture; curing; and standard of workmanship.

2. Build mockups of decorative concrete paving in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, build mockups where directed by Architect and not less than 96 inches (2400 mm) by 96 inches (2400 mm).




4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

B. Cold-Weather Concrete Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following:

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.

C. Hot-Weather Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap, so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves of a radius of 100 feet (30.5 m) or less.

B. Forms for Textured Finish Concrete: Units of face design, size, arrangement, and configuration indicated. Provide solid backing and form supports to ensure stability of textured form liners.

C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.




A. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.


A. Cementitious Materials: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, white portland cement Type I/II.2. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 1N, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal.2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

E. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.

1. Manufacturers:a. Butterfield Color; Tints Red, Blue and Green to produce pattern as listed belowb. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company

F. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

2.5 STAMPING DEVICES

A. Stamp Mats: Semirigid polyurethane mats with projecting textured and ridged underside capable of imprinting texture and joint patterns on plastic concrete.

B. Stamp Tools: Open-grid, aluminum or rigid-plastic stamp tool capable of imprinting joint patterns on plastic concrete.

C. Basis of Design : Subject to compliance provide Custom Leaf Pattern by Butterfield Color or equal1. Location: As Indicated on Drawings2. Dimensions:

a. Grout Line Width: 3/8″-7/8″b. Grout Line Depth: 1/16″-1/4″

3. Recommended Contractor Set: 10 Rigid, 2 Flex, 1 Skin, 1 Roller Sleeve4. Touch-up and Detailing Tools:

a. Chisels: 2″, 4″, & 8″ b. Touch-up Wheel: 3/16” or 3/8”

http://www.butterfieldcolor.com/tools/?product=2-chisel





2.6 CURING AND SEALING MATERIALS

A. Curing Paper: Nonstaining, waterproof paper, consisting of two layers of kraft paper cemented together and reinforced with fiber, and complying with ASTM C 171.

B. Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B, manufactured for colored concrete.

1. For integrally colored concrete, curing compound shall be pigmented type approved by coloring admixture manufacturer.

2. For concrete indicated to be sealed, curing compound shall be compatible with sealer.

C. Clear Acrylic Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, waterborne, nonyellowing and UV-resistant, membrane-forming, medium-gloss, acrylic copolymer emulsion solution, manufactured for colored concrete, containing not less than 15 percent solids by volume.

1. Manufacturers:a. Butterfield Colorb. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company


A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

C. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 1 mil (0.025 mm) thick, clear.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Obtain each color, size, type, and variety of concrete mixture from single manufacturer with resources to provide concrete of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

B. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method.

C. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:1. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan, and Slag Cement: 50 percent, with fly ash or pozzolan

not exceeding 25 percent.

D. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:

1. Air Content: 5 percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

E. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement.



F. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.

G. Concrete Mixtures: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi (20.7 MPa).2. Maximum W/C Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.50.3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

2.9 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below decorative concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes).

3. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm) according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

B. Protect adjacent construction from discoloration and spillage during application of color hardeners, release agents, stains, curing compounds, and sealers.

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.



B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded-wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) overlap to adjacent mats.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated.

2. Butt Joints: Use bonding agent at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

3. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.

4. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet (15.25 m) unless otherwise indicated.2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below

finished surface if joint sealant is indicated.4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated.5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or

clip joint-filler sections together.



6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.


A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast-in.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M) by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement dowels and joint devices.

H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

3.7 STAMPING

A. Mat Stamping: After floating and while concrete is plastic, apply mat-stamped finish.

1. Pigmented Powder Release Agent: Uniformly distribute onto concrete at a rate of 3 to 4 lb/100 sq. ft. (1.5 to 2 kg/10 sq. m).

2. Liquid Release Agent: Apply liquid release agent to the concrete surface and the stamp mat. Uniformly mist surface of concrete at a rate of 5 gal/1000 sq. ft. (0.2 L/sq. m).

3. After application of release agent, accurately align and place stamp mats in sequence.4. Uniformly load mats and press into concrete to produce required imprint pattern and

depth of imprint on concrete surface. Gently remove stamp mats. Hand stamp edges and surfaces unable to be imprinted by stamp mats.

5. Remove residual release agent according to manufacturer's written instructions, but no fewer than three days after stamping concrete. High-pressure-wash surface and joint patterns, taking care not to damage stamped concrete. Control, collect, and legally dispose of runoff.



B. Tool Stamping: After floating and while concrete is plastic, apply tool-stamped finish.

1. Cover surface with polyethylene film, stretch taut to remove wrinkles, lap sides and ends 3 inches (75 mm), and secure to edge forms. Lightly broom surface to remove air bubbles.

2. Accurately align and place stamp tools in sequence and tamp into concrete to produce required imprint pattern and depth of imprint on concrete surface. Gently remove stamp tools. Hand stamp edges and surfaces unable to be imprinted by stamp tools.

3. Carefully remove polyethylene film immediately after tool stamping.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Compound: Apply immediately after final finishing. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.

1. Cure integrally colored concrete with a[ pigmented] curing compound.2. Cure concrete finished with pigmented mineral dry-shake hardener with a[ pigmented]

curing compound.

F. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.

G. Curing Paper: Cure with unwrinkled curing paper in pieces large enough to cover the entire width and edges of slab. Do not lap sheets. Fold curing paper down over paving edges and secure with continuous banks of earth to prevent displacement or billowing due to wind. Immediately repair holes or tears in paper.

3.9 SEALER APPLICATION

A. Clear Acrylic Sealer: Apply uniformly in two coats in continuous operations according to manufacturer's written instructions. Allow first coat to dry before applying second coat, at 90 degrees to the direction of the first coat, using same application methods and rates.

1. Begin sealing dry surface no sooner than 14 days after concrete placement.2. Allow stained concrete surfaces to dry before applying sealer.3. Thoroughly mix slip-resistance-enhancing additive into sealer before applying sealer

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stir sealer occasionally during application to maintain even distribution of additive.



3.10 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 (ACI 117M) and as follows:

1. Elevation: 3/4 inch (19 mm).2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch

(13 mm).4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm).5. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm).6. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch per

12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm) of dowel.7. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm).8. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.9. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.


A. Remove and replace decorative concrete paving that is broken or damaged or does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Detailing: Grind concrete "squeeze" left from tool placement. Color ground areas with slurry of color hardener mixed with water and bonding agent. Remove excess release agent with high-velocity blower.

C. Protect decorative concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain decorative concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.





UNIT PAVING; SECTION 32 14 00Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 10

SECTION 32 14 00 - UNIT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Brick pavers set in bituminous mortar setting beds.2. Concrete pavers set in bituminous mortar setting beds.3. Stone pavers set in mortar setting beds.4. Cast-in-place concrete edge restraints.5. Stone curbs.


1. Section 32 13 13 "Concrete Paving" for concrete base under unit pavers and for cast-in-place concrete curbs and gutters serving as edge restraints for unit pavers.


A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates.

B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Pavers.2. Mortar and grout materials.3. Edge restraints.4. Granite curbs.

C. Sieve Analyses: For aggregate setting-bed materials, according to ASTM C 136.

D. Samples for Verification: For full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated. Assemble no fewer than five Samples of each type of unit on suitable backing and grout joints. Include Samples of the following:

1. Joint materials.2. Exposed edge restraints.3. Granite curbs.


A. Adhesion and Compatibility Test Reports: From latex-additive manufacturer for mortar and grout containing latex additives.





B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for unit pavers, indicating compliance with requirements.

1. For solid interlocking paving units, include test data for freezing and thawing according to ASTM C 67.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.



A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to latex-additive manufacturer, for testing as indicated below, Samples of flooring materials that will contact or affect mortar and grout that contain latex additives.

1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether mortar and grout materials will obtain optimal adhesion with, and will be nonstaining to, installed brick and other materials constituting brick flooring installation.


A. Store pavers on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store asphalt cement and other bituminous materials in tightly closed containers.


A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing.

B. Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed:

1. Install bituminous setting bed only when ambient temperature is above 40 deg F and when base is dry.

2. Apply asphalt adhesive only when ambient temperature is above 50 deg F and when temperature has not been below 35 deg F for 12 hours immediately before application. Do not apply when setting bed is wet or contains excess moisture.

C. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout:

1. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.





2. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. Provide artificial shade and windbreaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F and higher.

a. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or when wind velocity exceeds 8 mph and ambient temperature exceeds 90 deg F, set pavers within 1 minute of spreading setting-bed mortar.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from single source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

2.2 BRICK PAVERS

A. Brick Pavers: Heavy vehicular paving brick; ASTM C 1272. Provide brick without frogs or cores in surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Paver E: City Standard brick.

2. Thickness: Thickness: 2 3/4 inches (70 mm.3. Face Size: Face Size: 4 inches (102 mm) by 8 inches (203 mm.4. Color: Match Architect's sample.

B. Brick Pavers: Sidewalk paving brick; Class SX. Provide brick without frogs or cores in surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work.


a. Paver D: Reuse of existing cleaned Brick Pavers from City stock pile and match (City Standard).

2. Thickness: 2-1/4 inches (57 mm.3. Face Size: 4 inches (102 mm) by 8 inches (203 mm.4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Efflorescence: Brick shall be rated "not effloresced" when tested according to ASTM C 67.

D. Temporary Protective Coating: Precoat exposed surfaces of brick pavers with a continuous film of a temporary protective coating that is compatible with brick, mortar, and grout products and can be removed without damaging grout or brick. Do not coat unexposed brick surfaces; handle brick to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If, despite these precautions, coating does contact bonding surfaces of brick, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting brick.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=11233&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd






2.3 CONCRETE PAVERS

A. Pressed Concrete Pavers: Solid interlocking paving units complying with ASTM C 936/C 936M and resistant to freezing and thawing when tested according to ASTM C 67, made from normal-weight aggregates.


a. Paver A: Tectura Designs, Expogranite paver or equivalent.

2. Thickness: 4 inches (102 mm).3. Face Size and Shape: 15 inches x 30 inches (381-by-762-mm) rectangle.4. Color: Match Architect's samples for color, and finish. Match Control Sample 1 and

Control Sample 2. The Pattern of pavers will be a progressive percentage mix of the two control samples, as determined by the approved mock up.

2.4 STONE PAVERS

A. Granite Pavers: Rectangular paving slabs made from granite complying with ASTM C 615/C 615M.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Paver B: Coldspring Granite, Charcoal Black or equivalent.

2. Color and Grain: Medium gray with medium grain.3. Finish: Thermal, Match Architect's sample.4. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to

aesthetic effects.5. Thickness: Not less than 4 inches (102 mm) unless otherwise indicated.6. Face Size: 36 inches (915 mm) by 48 inches (1220 mm) rectangle.

B. Granite Pavers: Rectangular paving slabs made from granite complying with ASTM C 615/C 615M.


a. Paver C: Coldspring Granite, Charcoal Black or equivalent.

2. Color and Grain: Medium gray with medium grain.3. Finish: Thermal, Match Architect's sample.4. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to

aesthetic effects.5. Thickness: Not less than 3 1/16" (78 mm) unless otherwise indicated.6. Face Size: 12 inches (305 mm) by 24 inches (610 mm) rectangle.

C. Granite Pavers: Rectangular paving slabs made from granite complying with ASTM C 615/C 615M.


a. Paver "Flush Granite Band": Coldspring Granite, Charcoal Black or equivalent.

2. Color and Grain: Medium gray with medium grain.









3. Finish: Thermal, Match Architect's sample.4. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to

aesthetic effects.5. Thickness: Not less than 4 inches (102 mm) or 8 inches (203 mm) unless otherwise

indicated.6. Face Size: 12 inches (305 mm) by 36 - 96 inches (610 mm -2538mm) rectangle.

2.5 CURBS AND EDGE RESTRAINTS

A. Granite Curbs: Granite curbing, with face battered 1 inch per foot, produced in random lengths not less than 36 inches from granite complying with ASTM C 615/C 615M.


a. Reuse of existing in-place Granite Curbs b. Reuse of existing Granite Curbs from City stock pile.

2. Granite Color and Grain: Light gray with medium grain.3. Top Width: 6 inches.4. Face Height: 6 inches.5. Total Height: 12 inches .6. Top Finish: Bush hammered.7. Face Finish: Bush hammered.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1.

2.7 MORTAR SETTING-BED MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type II.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Sand: ASTM C 144.

2.8 GROUT MATERIALS

A. High-Performance Cement Grout: ANSI A118.7, sanded.

1.2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.b. C-Cure.c. Laticrete International, Inc.d. MAPEI Corporation.e. Summitville Tiles, Inc.



http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456974481&mf=&src=wd









3. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate or acrylic additive, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.

4. Polymer Type: styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.

B. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Water: Potable.

2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing times, and other procedures needed to produce setting-bed and joint materials of uniform quality and with optimal performance characteristics. Discard mortars and grout if they have reached their initial set before being used.

B. Mortar-Bed Bond Coat: Mix neat cement and to a creamy consistency.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Setting-Bed Mortar: Type M complying with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.

D. Packaged Grout: Proportion and mix according to grout manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive unit paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Where unit paving is to be installed over waterproofing, examine waterproofing installation, with waterproofing Installer present, for protection from paving operations, including areas where waterproofing system is turned up or flashed against vertical surfaces.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and waterproofing protection is in place.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.

B. Sweep concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.


A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, or other defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished work.





B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures.

C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.

1. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.

D. Handle protective-coated brick pavers to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If, despite these precautions, coating does contact bonding surfaces of brick, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting brick.

E. Joint Pattern: Running bond Herringbone Basket weave As indicated.

F. Pavers over Waterproofing: Exercise care in placing pavers and setting materials over waterproofing so protection materials are not displaced and waterproofing is not punctured or otherwise damaged. Carefully replace protection materials that become displaced and arrange for repair of damaged waterproofing before covering with paving.

1. Provide joint filler at waterproofing that is turned up on vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated; where unfilled joints are indicated, provide temporary filler or protection until paver installation is complete.

G. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/32-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 10 feet from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.

H. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 24 inches and 1/4 inch in 10 feet from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.

I. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant-filled joints at locations and of widths indicated. Provide compressible foam filler as backing for sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated; where unfilled joints are indicated, provide temporary filler until paver installation is complete. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Sealant materials and installation are specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

J. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.

1. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in aggregate setting bed, install pavers set in mortar and allow mortar to cure before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep angle so it will not interfere with aggregate setting bed.

2. Where pavers embedded in concrete are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in aggregate setting bed, install pavers embedded in concrete and allow concrete to cure before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Hold top of concrete below aggregate setting bed.

K. Provide steps made of pavers as indicated. Install paver steps before installing adjacent pavers.

1. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated for steps constructed adjacent to pavers set in aggregate setting bed, install steps and allow mortar to cure before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep angle so it will not interfere with aggregate setting bed.





3.4 MORTAR SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS

A. Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.

B. Apply mortar bed over bond coat; spread and screed mortar bed to uniform thickness at subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades indicated.

C. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with pavers before initial set. Before placing pavers, cut back, bevel edge, and remove and discard setting-bed material that has reached initial set.

D. Wet brick pavers before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

E. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers on mortar bed, apply uniform 1/16-inch- thick bond coat to mortar bed or to back of each paver with a flat trowel.

F. Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or disturb pavers for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.

G. Spaced Joint Widths: Provide 3/8-inch nominal joint width with variations not exceeding plus or minus 1/8 inch.

H. Grouted Joints: Grout paver joints complying with ANSI A108.10.

I. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed.

1. Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining surfaces.2. Clean pavers as grouting progresses by dry brushing or rubbing with dry burlap to

remove smears before tooling joints.3. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than

joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.4. If tooling squeezes grout from joints, remove excess grout and smears by dry brushing or

rubbing with dry burlap and tool joints again to produce a uniform appearance.

J. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days unless otherwise recommended by grout or liquid-latex manufacturer.

3.5 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with grout. Point joints at sealant joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for sealant application.

C. Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean.





1. Remove temporary protective coating as recommended by coating manufacturer and as acceptable to paver and grout manufacturers.

2. Do not allow protective coating to enter floor drains. Trap, collect, and remove coating material.







SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION); SECTION 32 91 15Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 11

SECTION 32 91 15 - SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes planting soils and layered soil assemblies specified according to performance requirements of the mixes.


1. Section 31 10 00 "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling.2. Section 32 93 00 "Plants" for placing planting soil for plantings.

1.3 ALLOWANCES

A. Preconstruction and field quality-control testing are part of testing and inspecting allowance.

1.4 UNIT PRICES

A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Section 01 22 00 "Unit Prices."

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. AAPFCO: Association of American Plant Food Control Officials.

B. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. This can be amended or unamended soil as indicated.

C. CEC: Cation exchange capacity.

D. Compost: The product resulting from the controlled biological decomposition of organic material that has been sanitized through the generation of heat and stabilized to the point that it is beneficial to plant growth.

E. Duff Layer: A surface layer of soil, typical of forested areas, that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

F. Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use.

G. Layered Soil Assembly: A designed series of planting soils, layered on each other, that together produce an environment for plant growth.



H. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced by blending soils, sand, stabilized organic soil amendments, and other materials to produce planting soil.

I. NAPT: North American Proficiency Testing Program. An SSSA program to assist soil-, plant-, and water-testing laboratories through interlaboratory sample exchanges and statistical evaluation of analytical data.

J. Organic Matter: The total of organic materials in soil exclusive of undecayed plant and animal tissues, their partial decomposition products, and the soil biomass; also called "humus" or "soil organic matter."

K. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified as specified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

L. RCRA Metals: Hazardous metals identified by the EPA under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act.

M. SSSA: Soil Science Society of America.

N. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

O. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms.

P. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil"; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

Q. USCC: U.S. Composting Council.



1. Include recommendations for application and use.2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.3. Include sieve analyses for aggregate materials.4. Material Certificates: For each type of imported soil and soil amendment and fertilizer

before delivery to the site, according to the following:

a. Manufacturer's qualified testing agency's certified analysis of standard products.b. Analysis of fertilizers, by a qualified testing agency, made according to AAPFCO

methods for testing and labeling and according to AAPFCO's SUIP #25.c. Analysis of nonstandard materials, by a qualified testing agency, made according

to SSSA methods, where applicable.

B. Samples: Landscape Architect will tag plants and materials at Nursery.


A. Qualification Data: For each testing agency.



B. Preconstruction Test Reports: For preconstruction soil analyses specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent, state-operated, or university-operated laboratory; experienced in soil science, soil testing, and plant nutrition; with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated; and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

1. Laboratories: Subject to compliance with requirements, :

a. Insert laboratory's name and address.

2. Multiple Laboratories: At Contractor's option, work may be divided among qualified testing laboratories specializing in physical testing, chemical testing, and fertility testing.


A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction soil analyses on existing, on-site soil.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when laboratory samples will be taken.

B. Preconstruction Soil Analyses: For each unamended soil type, perform testing on soil samples and furnish soil analysis and a written report containing soil-amendment and fertilizer recommendations by a qualified testing agency performing the testing according to "Soil-Sampling Requirements" and "Testing Requirements" articles.

1. Have testing agency identify and label samples and test reports according to sample collection and labeling requirements.

1.10 SOIL-SAMPLING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Extract soil samples according to requirements in this article.

B. Sample Collection and Labeling: Have samples taken and labeled by Owner under the direction of the testing agency.

1. Number and Location of Samples: Minimum of three representative soil samples from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for landscaping purposes.

2. Procedures and Depth of Samples: According to USDA-NRCS's "Field Book for Describing and Sampling Soils."

3. Division of Samples: Split each sample into two, equal parts. Send half to the testing agency and half to Owner for its records.

4. Labeling: Label each sample with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other location system, visible soil condition, and sampling depth.



1.11 TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Perform tests on soil samples according to requirements in this article.

B. Physical Testing:

1. Soil Texture: Soil-particle, size-distribution analysis by one of the following methods according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods":

a. Sieving Method: Report sand-gradation percentages for very coarse, coarse, medium, fine, and very fine sand; and fragment-gradation (gravel) percentages for fine, medium, and coarse fragments; according to USDA sand and fragment sizes.

b. Hydrometer Method: Report percentages of sand, silt, and clay.

2. Bulk Density: Analysis according to core method of SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

3. Total Porosity: Calculate using particle density and bulk density according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

4. Water Retention: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

5. Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods"; at 85 percent compaction according to ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor).

C. Chemical Testing:

1. CEC: Analysis by sodium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."

2. Clay Mineralogy: Analysis and estimated percentage of expandable clay minerals using CEC by ammonium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

3. Metals Hazardous to Human Health: Test for presence and quantities of RCRA metals including aluminum, arsenic, barium, copper, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If RCRA metals are present, include recommendations for corrective action.

4. Phytotoxicity: Test for plant-available concentrations of phytotoxic minerals including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chlorides, chromium, cobalt, copper, lead, lithium, mercury, nickel, selenium, silver, sodium, strontium, tin, titanium, vanadium, and zinc.

D. Fertility Testing: Soil fertility analysis according to standard laboratory protocol of SSSA NAPT NCR-13 , including the following:

1. Percentage of organic matter.2. CEC, calcium percent of CEC, and magnesium percent of CEC.3. Soil reaction (acidity/alkalinity pH value).4. Buffered acidity or alkalinity.5. Nitrogen ppm.6. Phosphorous ppm.7. Potassium ppm.8. Manganese ppm.9. Manganese-availability ppm.10. Zinc ppm.11. Zinc availability ppm.12. Copper ppm.



13. Sodium ppm and sodium absorption ratio.14. Soluble-salts ppm.15. Presence and quantities of problem materials including salts and metals cited in the

Standard protocol. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.

16. Other deleterious materials, including their characteristics and content of each.

E. Organic-Matter Content: Analysis using loss-by-ignition method according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 3-Chemical Methods."

F. Recommendations: Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants indicated. Include, at a minimum, recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium fertilization, and for micronutrients.

1. Fertilizers and Soil Amendment Rates: State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. for 6-inch depth of soil.

2. Soil Reaction: State the recommended liming rates for raising pH or sulfur for lowering pH according to the buffered acidity or buffered alkalinity in weight per 1000 sq. ft. for 6-inch depth of soil.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and compliance with state and Federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Do not move or handle materials when they are wet or frozen.4. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate

certificates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANTING SOILS SPECIFIED ACCORDING TO PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Planting-Soil Type: Existing, on-site surface soil, with the duff layer, if any, retained; modified to produce viable planting soil. Using preconstruction soil analyses and materials specified in other articles of this Section, amend existing, on-site surface soil to become planting soil complying with the following requirements:

1. Particle Size Distribution by USDA Textures: Classified as sandy loam soil according to USDA textures.

2. Particle Size Distribution by Separates:

a. Total Sand: Insert minimum value to Insert maximum value percent by dry weight.



b. Very Coarse Sand: Insert 10 percent by dry weight.c. Coarse Sand: Insert 10 percent by dry weight.d. Medium Sand: Insert 10 percent by dry weight.e. Fine Sand: Insert 10 percent by dry weight.f. Silt: Insert 10 percent by dry weight.g. Clay: Insert 10 percent by dry weight.h. Clay Mineralogy: Maximum Insert number percent by dry weight of expandable

clay minerals.

3. Fragment Size Distribution:

a. Fine Fragments: Maximum Insert 10 percent by dry weight.b. Medium Fragments: Maximum Insert 10 percent by dry weight.c. Sticks and Roots: Maximum Insert 10 percent by dry weight.d. Debris and Other Foreign Materials: Maximum Insert 10 percent by dry weight.

4. Percentage of Organic Matter: Minimum 6 percent by volume.5. Soil Reaction: pH of 6 to 7.6. CEC of Total Soil: Minimum 10 meq/100 mL at pH of 7.0.7. CEC of Clay Fraction: Maximum 15 meq/100 mL at pH of 7.0.8. Soluble-Salt Content: 5 to 10 dS/m measured by electrical conductivity.9. Bulk Density: 1.2 g/cu. cm to 1.5 g/cu. cm at 85 percent compaction.10. Total Porosity: Minimum 45 percent at 85 percent compaction.11. Macro Porosity: Minimum 10 percent at 85 percent compaction.12. Fertility: Insert nutrient and amount.13. Microbiological Content: Insert requirements.14. RCRA Metals: Below maximum limits established by the EPA.15. Phytotoxicity: Below phytotoxicity limits established by SSSA.

B. Planting-Soil Type: Imported, naturally formed soil from off-site sources and consisting of sandy loam soil Insert soil texture according to USDA textures; and modified to produce viable planting soil. Amend imported soil with materials specified in other articles of this Section to become planting soil complying with the following requirements:

1. Sources: Take imported, unamended soil from sources that are naturally well-drained sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep, not from agricultural land, bogs, or marshes; and that do not contain undesirable organisms; disease-causing plant pathogens; or obnoxious weeds and invasive plants including, but not limited to, quackgrass, Johnsongrass, poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic, ground ivy, perennial sorrel, and bromegrass.

2. Additional Properties of Imported Soil before Amending: Minimum of 4 percent organic-matter content, friable, and with sufficient structure to give good tilth and aeration. Clean soil to be of the following:

a. Unacceptable Materials: Concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth.

b. Unsuitable Materials: Stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand that exceed a combined maximum of 8 percent by dry weight of the imported soil.

c. Large Materials: Stones, clods, roots, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand exceeding 2 inches in any dimension.

3. Particle Size Distribution by Separates:



a. Total Sand: Insert 10 percent by dry weight.b. Very Coarse Sand: Insert 10 percent by dry weight.c. Coarse Sand: Insert 10 percent by dry weight.d. Medium Sand: Insert 10 percent by dry weight.e. Fine Sand: Insert 10 percent by dry weight.f. Silt: Insert 10 percent by dry weight.g. Clay: Insert 10 percent by dry weight.h. Clay Mineralogy: Maximum Insert 10 percent by dry weight of expandable clay

minerals.

4. Fragment Size Distribution:

a. Fine Fragments: Maximum Insert 10 percent by dry weight.b. Medium Fragments: Maximum Insert 10 percent by dry weight.c. Coarse Fragments: Maximum Insert 10 percent by dry weight.d. Sticks and Roots: Maximum Insert 10 percent by dry weight.e. Debris and Other Foreign Materials: Maximum Insert 10 percent by dry weight.

5. Percentage of Organic Matter: Minimum 10 percent by volume.6. Soil Reaction: pH of 6 to 7.7. CEC of Total Soil: Minimum 10 meq/100 mL at pH of 7.0.8. CEC of Clay Fraction: Maximum 15 meq/100 mL at pH of 7.0.9. Soluble-Salt Content: 5 to 10 dS/m measured by electrical conductivity.10. Bulk Density: 1.2 g/cu. cm to 1.5 g/cu. cm at 85 percent compaction.11. Total Porosity: Minimum 45 percent at 85 percent compaction.12. Macro Porosity: Minimum 10 percent at 85 percent compaction.13. Fertility: Insert nutrient and amount.14. Microbiological Content: Insert requirements.15. RCRA Metals: Below maximum limits established by the EPA.16. Phytotoxicity: Below phytotoxicity limits established by SSSA.

2.2 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter produced by composting feedstock, and bearing USCC's "Seal of Testing Assurance," and as follows:

1. Feedstock: May include sewage sludge.2. Reaction: pH of 5.5 to 8.3. Soluble-Salt Concentration: Less than 4 dS/m.4. Moisture Content: 35 to 55 percent by weight.5. Organic-Matter Content: 30 to 40 percent of dry weight.6. Particle Size: Minimum of 98 percent passing through a 2-inch sieve.

B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture with 100 percent passing through a 1/2-inch sieve, a pH of 3.4 to 4.8, and a soluble-salt content measured by electrical conductivity of dS/m.

2.3 FERTILIZERS

A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 33 percent available phosphoric acid.



B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.

2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified testing agency.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Place planting soil and fertilizers according to requirements in other Specification Sections.

B. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in planting soil.

C. Proceed with placement only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION OF UNAMENDED, ON-SITE SOIL BEFORE AMENDING

A. Excavation: Excavate soil from designated area(s) to a depth of 6 inches and stockpile until amended.

B. Unacceptable Materials: Clean soil of concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth.

C. Unsuitable Materials: Clean soil to contain a combined maximum of 8 percent by dry weight of stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand.

D. Screening: Pass unamended soil through a 2-inch sieve to remove large materials.

3.3 PLACING AND MIXING PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE

A. General: Apply and mix unamended soil with amendments on-site to produce required planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of 8 inches . Remove stones larger than 3 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply, add soil amendments, and mix approximately half the thickness of unamended soil over prepared, loosened subgrade according to "Mixing" Paragraph below. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil.

C. Mixing: Spread unamended soil to total depth of 8 inches , but not less than required to meet finish grades after mixing with amendments and natural settlement. Do not spread if soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.



1. Amendments: Apply soil amendments, except compost, and fertilizer, if required, evenly on surface, and thoroughly blend them with unamended soil to produce planting soil.

a. Mix with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.b. Mix fertilizer with planting soil no more than seven days before planting.

2. Lifts: Apply and mix unamended soil and amendments in lifts not exceeding 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by compaction equipment, and not more than 6 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

D. Compaction: Compact each blended lift of planting soil to 75 to 82 percent of maximum Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698 except where a different compaction value is indicated on Drawings.

E. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

3.4 BLENDING PLANTING SOIL IN PLACE

A. General: Mix amendments with in-place, unamended soil to produce required planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Preparation: Till unamended, existing soil in planting areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches . Remove stones larger than 3 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Mixing: Apply soil amendments, except compost, and fertilizer, if required, evenly on surface, and thoroughly blend them into full depth of unamended, in-place soil to produce planting soil.

1. Mix with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.2. Mix fertilizer with planting soil no more than seven days before planting.

D. Compaction: Compact blended planting soil to 75 to 82 percent of maximum Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698 except where a different compaction value is indicated on Drawings.

E. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

3.5 APPLYING COMPOST TO SURFACE OF PLANTING SOIL

A. Application: Apply compost component of planting-soil mix to surface of in-place planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Finish Grading: Grade surface to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

3.6 LAYERED SOIL ASSEMBLIES

A. Layered Soil Assembly :

1. Top Layer: Planting-soil type.



2. Insert layer designation: Planting-soil type.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Compaction: Test planting-soil compaction after placing each lift and at completion using a densitometer or soil-compaction meter calibrated to a reference test value based on laboratory testing according to ASTM D 698. Space tests at no less than one for each 2000 sq. ft. of in-place soil or part thereof.

2. Performance Testing: For each amended planting-soil type, demonstrating compliance with specified performance requirements. Perform testing according to "Soil-Sampling Requirements" and "Testing Requirements" articles.

3.4. Insert name of inspection: Insert requirement.

C. Soil will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Label each sample and test report with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other location system, visible conditions when and where sample was taken, and sampling depth.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protection Zone: Identify protection zones according to Section 01 56 39 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

B. Protect areas of in-place soil from additional compaction, disturbance, and contamination. Prohibit the following practices within these areas except as required to perform planting operations:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.2. Parking vehicles or equipment.3. Vehicle traffic.4. Foot traffic.5. Erection of sheds or structures.6. Impoundment of water.7. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.

C. If planting soil or subgrade is overcompacted, disturbed, or contaminated by foreign or deleterious materials or liquids, remove the planting soil and contamination; restore the subgrade as directed by Architect and replace contaminated planting soil with new planting soil.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Protect areas adjacent to planting-soil preparation and placement areas from contamination. Keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.



B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable materials, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property unless otherwise indicated.

1. Dispose of excess subsoil and unsuitable materials on-site where directed by Owner.



PLANTS; SECTION 32 93 00Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 15

SECTION 32 93 00 - PLANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Tree stabilization.2. Tree-watering devices.3. Landscape edgings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with a ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.

C. Bare-Root Stock: Plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than the minimum root spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

D. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

E. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. Some sources classify herbicides separately from pesticides.

F. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

G. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.

H. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. See Section 32 91 15 "Soil Preparation (Performance Specification)" for drawing designations for planting soils.

I. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.



J. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.

K. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface.

L. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated.

1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.



1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials.B. Samples for Verification: Landscape Architect will tag trees, plants and materials at

Nursery.


A. Verify plant count from plan, and provide and install all plant material on plan.

B. All plants shall conform to or surpass minimum quality standards as defined by the American Association of Nurserymen; current edition of American Standards for Nursery Stock published by American Association of Nurseryman, Inc. and in addition shall conform to sizes and descriptions in the plant list. All work to be performed by a firm specializing in Landscaping, not a subcontractor.

C. The Landscape Architect will consider the grower and tree changes in list below and will consider alternate plant material only if the following information is submitted for each variety of tree on tree list below 14 days or more prior to bid date.

SPECIFIEDQUANTITY

SPECIFIEDSIZE

SPECIFIED TREE SUGGESTED TREE GROWER

PROPOSED TREE CHANGESIF APPLICABLE

PROPOSED TREE

GROWER

6 6” calQuercus phellos

‘Ascendor’Select Trees or

equivalent

6 6” calQuercus nuttalli

‘Sangria’Select Trees or

equivalent

10 6” calQuercus lyrata

‘Highbeam’Select Trees or

equivalent



D. If acceptable, the Landscape Architect will tentatively accept (subject to tagging) growers and trees for the list above and proposed alternates within 5 days of date submitted. Landscape Contractor must have written conditional acceptance from Landscape Architect for this tree list and of any proposed alternate growers and plant materials to submit with the Bid Package, otherwise, the bid will not be accepted.

1. For all specified trees and approved substitutes, Landscape Contractor will provide the following information with the bid, otherwise bid will not be accepted. Requests for approval of trees from above list and grower and for approval of substitute plant material shall include:

a. Include grower name, current address and phone numberb. Common and Botanical name

1) Size now and size at deliveryc. Photos of each tree proposed

1) Entire tree with size pole2) Close up of trunk flare3) Each photo watermarked with grower name

d. Representative photo (each photo watermarked with grower name) of a tree root system (with soil freshly removed) for each variety proposed

e. Signed statement from grower describing and certifying:1) Root pruning and root enhancement history2) That all root systems have been field grown in heavy clay soil, irrigated with

drip irrigation, and have been transplanted and 100% mechanically root pruned with a vibrating blade during the first three years of the trees’ life

3) All trees will have been grown in no container larger than one gallon4) Trunk flares are visible above ground for all trees

f. Canopy Development1) Strong Central Leader to the top of the canopy. The tip of the leader on the

main trunk must be intact and its terminal bud must be the highest part of the tree.

2) No branch shall have a diameter greater than 2/3 the trunk diameter measured directly above the branch crotch. The tree crown must be structurally uniform. Branches shall be evenly distributed around the trunk. The crown shall be full of foliage which is evenly distributed around the tree.

2. Landscape Architect will select and tag 100% of plant materials from acceptable growers within 30 days after date contract is awarded to General Contractor or Landscape Contractor, whichever first occurs.

3. Orders for plant material: Submit confirmed orders for trees approved by Landscape Architect from above list and any approved alternate trees to Landscape Architect within 21 days from date contract is awarded to General Contractor or Landscape Contractor, whichever first occurs. Contractor is responsible for payment of deposits required by growers. If the Landscape Architect does not receive all copies of all confirmed orders by 30 days from date contract is awarded, General Contractor will be charged ½ of 1% of the total contract per day beginning on the 31st day.

E. Plant Schedule/Bid Document Cost Breakdown:

1. Landscape Contractor to submit a breakdown sheet for the tree list in 1-F above with the following information with their bid. Any bid submitted without the Cost Breakdown shall be considered incomplete.

2. Bidders shall verify quantities listed below by his own take-off from the drawings and notify the landscape architect of discrepancies before submitting his bid.



QTY BOTANICAL NAME SOURCE UNIT TREE COST

(EXCLUDING FTR)

UNIT INSTALL

COST (EXCLUDING

COST OF TREE & FTR)

UNIT COST FOR

FREIGHT (FULL

TRUCK LOADS)

TOTAL UNIT COST PER TREE

6

6

10

F. Approval and selection of materials and work: The selection of all materials and the execution of all operations required under the Drawings and Specifications is subject to the approval of the owner and Landscape Architect. They have the right to reject any and all materials and any and all Work, which in their opinion does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents at any stage of the operations. Remove rejected Work and or materials from the Project Site and replace promptly at no additional cost to the owner.

G. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating Installer’s capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and years completed. Include names and contact information of owner’s representative.

H. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following:

1. Manufacturer’s certified analysis of standard products.

2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.

I. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer’s application instructions specific to Project.


A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants.

1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association.

2. Experience: Three years' experience in landscape installation in addition to requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."

3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

4. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in one of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network:a. Landscape Industry Certified Technician - Exterior.b. Landscape Industry Certified Interior.c. Landscape Industry Certified Horticultural Technician.



5. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with state and Federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials; discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.

C. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.

D. Notify Landscape Architect seven days in advance of delivery of planting materials to site.

E. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.

1. Caution: Use extreme caution when handling trees. Use a strap or chain cradle (adequate for weight and size of tree and rootball) attached to the root ball to unload & move trees. Strapping & wire baskets can break or loosen. Never move, lift, or handle by attaching to or by putting pressure on the trunk. Be very careful not to damage or scar trunks & branches.

2. Unloading: Prior to unloading, proper moisture should be maintained in root balls. Trucks should be staged in the shade prior to unloading. Unloading time should be no more than two hours per truck.

3. Stand-Up: Immediately after unloading (no more than one hour after unloading), stand the trees up. This will reduce the risk of sun-scald. Properly staged trees are standing, canopies untied, & spaced so that canopies are not touching. Trees should not be staged on pavement. Concrete blocks or wood blocks can be used to support root balls. Sides of rootballs should not be in contact with soil or mulch.

4. Trunk Protectors: Remove the cardboard trunk protector within 48 hours of trees being stood upright to reduce the risk of later damage to bark and trunk. Save trunk protectors and attach to trees just prior to moving.

5. Moisture: Monitor moisture in the root ball by probing with a soil probe & manage supplemental irrigation accordingly. Be careful not to over or under irrigate.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work.



B. Planting Restrictions: Ball and Burlap trees may be planted anytime the ground is not frozen or during extremely hot weather. It is preferred to plant while the tree is dormant. Scheduling must be approved by Landscape Architect.

C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of

adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner.b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.c. Faulty performance of tree stabilization edgings .

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months.b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months.c. Annuals: Three months.

3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the

succeeding planting season.b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at

end of warranty period.c. A limit of one replacement of each plant is required except for losses or

replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced

plant material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant List, Plant Schedule, or Plant Legend indicated on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.

C. Labeling: Label each plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant.



D. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is indicated on Drawings, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting.

E. Perennials: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed, with well-established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in bud but not yet in bloom.

2.2 FERTILIZERS

A. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip-type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots.

1. Size: 21-gram tablets, or as directed on label for size of plant.2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent

potassium, by weight plus micronutrients.

2.3 MULCHES

A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:

1. Color: Natural.

2.4 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated.

2.5 ROOT | PAVEMENT STABILIZATION MATERIALS

A. Root Stabilization Materials:

1. Proprietary Root-Ball Stabilization Devices: Proprietary below-grade modular suspended pavement stabilization system to transfer paving loads vertically downward to a compacted sub-base through the posts protecting root growth and providing on-site storm-water management.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Silva Cell; DeepRoot Green Infrastructure, LLC.




b. System: Silva Cell 2 is composed of a base, posts, and a deck. Each unit is 48" (1200 mm) long x 24" (600 mm) wide. The assembled cells are available in three heights: 1x (16.7"/424 mm), 2x (30.9"/784 mm), and 3x (43"/1092 mm).

2.6 TREE-WATERING DEVICES

A. Slow-Release Watering Device: Standard product manufactured for drip irrigation of plants and emptying its water contents over two to three weeks; manufactured from UV-light-stabilized nylon-reinforced polyethylene sheet, PVC, or HDPE plastic.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:a. BIO-PLEX.b. Engineered Watering Solutions; PQ Partners, LLC.c. Spectrum Products, Inc.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Root Barrier: Black, molded, modular panels 18 inches high (deep), 85 mils thick, and with vertical root deflecting ribs protruding 3/4 inch out from panel surface; manufactured with minimum 50 percent recycled polyethylene plastic with UV inhibitors.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings by Deep Root Green Infrastructure, LLC as appropriate component of Silva Cell or comparable product by one of the following:a. NDS Inc.b. Villa Root Barrier.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive plants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Verify that plants and vehicles loaded with plants can travel to planting locations with adequate overhead clearance.

3. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.

4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.

B. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil.












3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance of layout before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required.

3.3 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT

A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to Section 32 91 15 "Soil Preparation (Performance Specification)."

B. PERCOLATION TEST: Prior to planting, check soil drainage with a percolation test and send results to owner and landscape architect at least two weeks prior to planting. The rate at which water drains through the soil affects plants’ survival and growth. Poorly drained soil results in too much water in the root zone and a lack of needed oxygen for healthy roots. To determine percolation rate, dig a hole 1 foot deep, fill with water and see how long it takes to empty. If the water level drops more slowly than 1 inch per hour, do not plant until drainage is corrected and satisfactory percolation test is completed.

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits.

1. Excavate planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are unacceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

2. Excavate approximately two times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped stock.

3. Excavate hole no deeper than 2” shallower than the rootball depth. If a hole is over-excavated, use size 57 stone gravel placed in the bottom of the hole, beginning at undisturbed soil, and fill up to the level where bottom of rootball should rest. Do not place soil back in an over-excavated hole.

4. Maintain angles of repose of adjacent materials to ensure stability. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements.

5. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours.

6. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected when unattended by Installer's personnel.

B. Backfill Soil: Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may not be used as backfill soil unless otherwise indicated.



C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.

3.5 TREE PLANTING

A. Preparation: Before planting, remove any plastic wrap & any circling roots from the root ball. Handle tree only by root ball and be certain your equipment, including strap & chain cradles, are rated for the weight you are lifting.

B. Equipment: Use a telehandler machine with side-tilt carriage forks (brands such as Lull or JLG) machine unless written approval to do otherwise is given by the landscape architect. A telehandler rated to handle weights of rootballs and trees should be used to set root balls in planting pits. Forks should always be carefully positioned above rootball to lift rootball by strapping on top of the root ball with four pick-up points for even weight distribution. Prior to setting rootball in planting pit, forks should be adjusted so that tree is plumb. Place rootball at a level where the trunk flare will be 2’’ above surrounding finished grade after settling.

C. Straight and Plumb: Maintain the tree with forks in a straight & plumb position while backfilling and watering.

D. Backfill/Water: After 1/2 backfill, watering, & the tree is plumb, then add backfill to just below the top horizontal ring of the wire basket, completely saturate planting hole. Adjust root ball (if necessary) by adjusting forks to make tree straight & plumb and at proper depth. Do not remove forks until tree is straight and plumb, backfill is settled, and rootball is stable. Place planting tablets equally distributed around each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch (25 mm) from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.

1. Fertilizer Tablet Quantity: As indicated on label for plant size

E. Remove Forks: After above items have been completed and tree is straight and plumb with rootball stable and at proper depth, gently remove forks and also remove:

1. The synthetic strap,2. Any cardboard packaging,3. The top portion of the wire basket down to & including the first horizontal ring,4. The burlap from the top portion of the root ball

F. Backfill/Water: Complete the backfill & thoroughly saturate with water. Repeat this step if necessary to make absolutely certain that air pockets do not exist in the backfill.

G. When Soil on Top of Rootball is Distorted or not Perpendicular to Tree Trunk: Even rootballs with excellent root systems grown and harvested at proper depth can sometimes become distorted during shipping and handling. Actions to take if soil on top of rootball has become distorted:

1. If soil is bulging or distorted on the top surface of the rootball:a. Very gently tamp the area of bulging or distorted soil as much as possible so that soil

is perpendicular to trunk.b. If soil is still bulging or distorted, very gently (with a sharp shovel or spade) cut and

remove remaining bulge.2. Rootball distortion can be minimized by:

a. Providing as much advance notice as possible so that nursery will be able to best manage soil moisture during harvest, loading, and shipping.

b. Coordinating scheduling so that trees will not be shipped during significant rain.



c. Following the previous handling planting and care instructions. When a tree is handled, moved, adjusted, straightened, etc. More than the minimum steps covered in these instructions, the possibility of rootball distortion and other damage increases. Rootballs that are moved when extremely wet are the most likely to become distorted or damaged.

H. Staking: Immediately after backfill has settled & the tree is straight & plumb, stake tree to provide stability until root system is thoroughly established in the backfill. Check staking as needed to make sure trunk damage does not occur. Check to confirm that tree and root ball are stable before removing staking.

I. Mulch: Mulch the area over the root ball to a depth no deeper than 1 1/2’’ to 2”. Keep all mulch away from the trunk flare. Bark tissue that is in contact with mulch is likely to soften and to attract insects and disease. Remove any old mulch before applying new mulch.

J. Straightening: If for any reason trees need straightening, trees can be straightened by carefully digging out all backfill around the root ball, attaching seat belt strap to the wire basket and lifting. Never pull, push, or put pressure on the trunk (refer to actions b.3 - b.13 for information to complete this process). If tree roots are significantly established in the backfill, it is best for the health of the trees to wait until dormancy to straighten trees, since roots outside the original rootball will be cut

1. Backfill: Planting soil for trees, use excavated soil for backfill.

3.6 TREE, AND SHRUB PRUNING

A. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character.

B. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.

3.7 TREE STABILIZATION

A. Staking should not be needed if the tree’s canopy and trunk are in proportion. The most common cause of trees not remaining plumb is poor soil compaction within, under, or around the rootball. Trees out of plumb may not be “blowing over” but may actually be settling in the soil. Unless there is a specific reason to stake, agreed upon by the Contractor, Landscape Architect and Consulting Arborist, no staking or guying should occur.

B. If cause is found to stake the trees, the solution must be project specific and respond expressly to the reason found to for staking. Should staking be required, the simplest, least restrictive method should be used. Brace the tree at the lowest possible position so that the canopy can move. Movement in the trunk increases root growth and lower truck caliper growth. Trees that are rigidly braced tend to grow fewer roots, add less trunk diameter and more top growth.

3.8 ROOT-BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Install root barrier where trees are planted within 48 inches of paving or other hardscape elements, such as walls, curbs, and walkways, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.



B. Align root barrier vertically, and run it linearly along and adjacent to the paving or other hardscape elements to be protected from invasive roots.

C. Install root barrier continuously for a distance of 60 inches in each direction from the tree trunk, for a total distance of 10 feet per tree. If trees are spaced closer, use a single continuous piece of root barrier.

1. Position top of root barrier according to manufacturer's written recommendations.2. Overlap root barrier a minimum of 12 inches at joints.3. Do not distort or bend root barrier during construction activities.4. Do not install root barrier surrounding the root ball of tree.

3.9 PLACING SOIL IN PLANTERS

A. Place a layer of drainage gravel at least 4 inches thick in bottom of planter. Cover bottom with filter fabric and wrap filter fabric 4 inches up on all sides. Duct tape along the entire top edge of the filter fabric, to secure the filter fabric against the sides during the soil-filling process.

B. Fill planter with planting soil. Place soil in lightly compacted layers to an elevation of 1-1/2 inches below top of planter, allowing natural settlement.

3.10 EDGING INSTALLATION

A. Steel Edging: Install steel edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately 30 inches apart, driven below top elevation of edging.

3.11 INSTALLING SLOW-RELEASE WATERING DEVICE

A. Provide one device for each tree.

B. Place device on top of the mulch at base of tree stem and fill with water according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.12 PLANT MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings.

3.13 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.



3.14 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

A. General: Repair or replace existing or new trees and other plants that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.

1. Submit details of proposed pruning and repairs.2. Perform repairs of damaged trunks, branches, and roots within 24 hours, if approved.3. Replace trees and other plants that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status,

as determined by Architect.


A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.

D. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.

E. At time of Substantial Completion, verify that tree-watering devices are in good working order and leave them in place. Replace improperly functioning devices.

3.16 MAINTENANCE: POST – INSTALLATION TREE CARE

A. Water Management: Both excess soil moisture and lack of soil moisture will cause root death that will lead to canopy decline and tree death:

1. Monitoring Soil Moisture: a. A Tree Maintenance Spreadsheet or “TMS” (available from Select Trees) should be

completely updated at least once weekly (daily when probing shows wet or dry soil) with actions performed to achieve proper soil moisture during the first two full growing seasons, from April 1 through October 31, and at least once every two weeks during subsequent growing seasons, as well as every two weeks from November 1 through March 30. These spreadsheets must be emailed to and received by the landscape architect and owner’s representative within 24 hours of each update.

b. Monitor moisture in the root ball and in the backfill with a soil probe and adjust soil moisture accordingly. Probe to a minimum 6” depth in the rootball and minimum 30” depth in the backfill. Be careful not to over or under irrigate.

1) If soil is dry or wet in rootball or in backfill, take steps daily to remedy and continue to probe daily and update and email TMS until proper soil moisture is achieved.

2) Flags: marking trees with flags during probing will serve as a visual indicator of your probing results. This should help to prioritize immediate actions for dry or wet soil conditions.



3) Summary of the Tree Maintenance Spreadsheet (summary TMS) should be completed at least once every two weeks for the first two years and emailed per instructions in 1a above. Your continued analysis of the summary tms should illustrate trends for the most effective management of soil moisture.

c. If soil moisture is wet in rootball or in backfill, stop all irrigation and take steps to remedy wet soil conditions as follows:

1) Probe daily per instructions on tree maintenance spreadsheet until proper soil moisture is achieved.

2) Evaluate & remedy any sources of water that affect trees in question including rain, irrigation, and sub-surface water.

3) Install two sump pipes per tree if soil moisture in backfill continues to remain wet for a period of three or more consecutive days.

4) Inspect & pump out sump pipes daily until water is not present in sump pipes.

5) Conduct irrigation audit to determine if excess water is coming from irrigation and adjust tree irrigation accordingly.

6) If above steps are not effective to remedy wet soil conditions, subsurface drainage may be required to create proper soil moisture.

d. If soil moisture is dry, apply water immediately.

1) Irrigation Bags– when soil probing indicates that root balls are in need of water, irrigation bags can be added immediately to allow for slow application of water.

TREE CALIPERNUMBER IRRIGATION BAGS ZIPPED TOGETHER PER TREE

• less than 3” 1

• 3” - 5” 2

• 5” - 7” 3

• 7” - 10” 4

2) Irrigation bags should not stay on the trunk long enough to soften trunk tissue or to provide a haven for pests. Bags should be removed approximately every 8-10 days for a period of 2-3 days. If practical, the best times to remove bags are during cloudy or rainy weather. This will minimize risk of sunscald damage. While the bags are off the tree, alternate methods of applying water should be used if needed

B. Prevention of Cold Damage: In general, cold damage is most likely to affect trees that are either in a poor state of health or in a very active state of growth when cold weather occurs after warm weather and can happen both in the fall and the spring. Very low cold temperature during winter can also cause cold damage. Cold damage can be minimized by avoiding all activity that might cause prolonged or excessive growth at the end of the growing season. The following are examples of such activities that should be avoided between July 1 and dormancy:

1. Pruning2. Vertical mulching3. Fertilization4. Slow release fertilizer at any time that will have the residual effect of promoting too much

vigor at end of growing season

C. Pre-Emerge Herbicide: Do not apply pre-emerge herbicides to any areas that could affect tree roots for at least the first 5 years.



D. Nutrition: Monitor nutrition and implement nutrition actions as needed based on soil and/or tissue samples/analysis. Consult testing facility for instructions for taking samples.

E. Pests: Trees should be monitored for boring insects for at least the first two years after Installation. Preventive pesticide applications for boring insects are recommended during the first two years.

F. Removal of Staking: Loosen all staking systems as needed to prevent damage to trunk, stems, and bark. Completely remove all staking systems when roots are established to the point that staking is not needed.

G. Pruning: Proactive structural pruning is recommended. We recommend Ed Gilman’s Illustrated Guide to Pruning as a valuable resource for proper pruning practices. Book link: http://www.amazon.com/illustrated-guide-pruning-ed-gilman/dp/0766822710

H. Vertical Mulch: Vertical mulching is almost always beneficial to trees of all ages. Vertical mulching increases water and air infiltration to the tree root zone. This should only be done by a reputable certified arborist.

1. Vertical mulching can be accomplished by using an auger with a 1 ½ - 2” bit and drilling holes roughly 16-18” apart in a grid pattern approximately 18” deep. Always locate and avoid underground utilities and other obstacles before digging. Use caution to avoid remaining portions of the wire basket and other underground obstacles.

2. Drill the holes out to (or beyond if possible) the drip line of the tree. Start the process a safe distance from the trunk and underground utilities. Keep the bit away from any large diameter roots. Fill the holes with the following mixture:a. Pea gravel (gravel will not break down and thus will provide longer aeration benefit)b. Fertilizer & lime (if needed) based on soil tissue analysis

3. Trees should be watered thoroughly immediately before and after vertical mulching is completed.

I. Treating Trunk Damage: Use an xacto knife to remove dead bark from around the damaged areas to help wounds callous more quickly. Wounds add additional stress to the tree and create potential entry sites for secondary pests such as borers. We recommend spraying damaged trees with preventative treatments combined with a systemic application labeled for borer control. This should only be done by a reputable certified arborist.

J. Arborist: It is advised to establish a relationship with a certified arborist during the planting process and to maintain this relationship as the trees establish. During the initial two years, an arborist should examine the trees at the beginning and end of the growing season, with a yearly visit after that. This will be helpful in maintaining the health and vigor of the trees, observing and correcting problems early


http://www.amazon.com/Illustrated-Guide-Pruning-Ed-Gilman/dp/0766822710

DIVISION 33




COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES; SECTION 33 05 00Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 9Copyright 2016 TIMMONS GROUP

SECTION 33 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Piping joining materials.

2. Transition fittings.

3. Sleeves.

4. Identification devices.

5. Grout.

6. Flowable fill.

7. Piped utility demolition.

8. Piping system common requirements.

9. Equipment installation common requirements.

10. Concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions.

B. Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

C. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

D. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Identification devices.






A. Welding certificates.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Steel Piping Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting if devices are applied to surfaces.

C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Formwork, reinforcement, and concrete requirements are specified in Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.





2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.

2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

H. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.

2.2 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Transition Fittings, General: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

B. Transition Couplings NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller:

1. Underground Piping: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

C. AWWA Transition Couplings NPS 2 and Larger:


a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

b. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div.

c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div.

d. JCM Industries.

e. Smith-Blair, Inc.

f. Viking Johnson.

2. Description: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling for underground pressure piping.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=3639&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456814062&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd











a. Spears Manufacturing Co.

2. Description: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint[ or threaded] end.

E. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:


a. Colonial Engineering, Inc.

b. NIBCO INC.

c. Spears Manufacturing Co.

2. Description: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include brass or stainless-steel threaded end, solvent-cement-joint[ or threaded] plastic end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.

F. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping:


a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

b. Fernco, Inc.

c. Mission Rubber Company.

d. Plastic Oddities.

2. Description: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

2.3 SLEEVES

A. Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations are specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

C. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

D. Cast-Iron Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

E. PVC sleeves in first two paragraphs below may be prohibited by fire authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Molded PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

G. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

H. Molded PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.















2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other utilities Sections. If more than single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.

B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or stamped.

1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating

and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.

2. Location: Accessible and visible.

C. Snap-on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap-on type. Include color-coding according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color-coded, pressure-sensitive-vinyl type with permanent adhesive.

E. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.

F. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, at least three times letter height and of length required for label.

G. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by the City.

H. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length.

1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions of flow, or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

I. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive vinyl tape, at least 3 mils thick.1. Width: 1-1/2 inches on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches; 2-1/2

inches for larger pipes.

2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch sequenced numbers. Include 5/32-inch hole for fastener.1. Material: 0.032-inch- thick, [polished brass] [or] [aluminum].

2. Size: 1-1/2 inches in diameter, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Shape: As indicated for each piping system.

K. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link or beaded chain; or brass S-hooks.

2.5 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.





2.6 FLOWABLE FILL

A. Description: Low-strength-concrete, flowable-slurry mix.1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, portland.

2. Density: 115- to 145-lb/cu. ft..

3. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, fine and crushed gravel or stone, coarse.

4. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, fine.

5. Admixture: ASTM C 618, fly-ash mineral.

6. Water: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

7. Strength: 100 to 200 psig at 28 days.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPED UTILITY DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove piped utility systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or

plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping. Fill abandoned piping with flowable fill,

and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational.

5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment and deliver to the City.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.


A. Install piping according to the following requirements and utilities Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on the Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

E. Install piping at indicated slopes.





F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

I. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

J. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of equipment areas or other wet

areas 2 inches above finished floor level.2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.

L. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements.

3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and utilities Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

G. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end pipe coupling with coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Assemble joints for plain-end copper tube and mechanical pressure seal fitting with proprietary crimping tool to according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:





1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes.

3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.

4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and

socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.

J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.

C. Install equipment to allow right of way to piping systems installed at required slope.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.

1. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot noninsulated piping.

2. Locate pipe markers on exposed piping according to the following:a. Near each valve and control device.b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for equipment and terminal units. Mark

each pipe at branch if flow pattern is not obvious.c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors or enter inaccessible

enclosures.d. At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of equipment.





1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch high for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch high for distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for

greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths of size of

principal lettering.

2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish among

multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency

precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions.

3.7 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's

written instructions at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in

both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise

indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete

base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be

embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in

Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.8 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.



STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING; SECTION 33 41 00 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 9Copyright 2016 TIMMONS GROUP

SECTION 33 41 00 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe and fittings.2. Cleanouts.3. Drains.4. Manholes.5. Catch basins.6. Stormwater inlets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. HDPE: High Density Polyethylene

B. RCP: Reinforced Concrete Pipe

C. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe



1. HDPE Pipe2. Cleanouts and Fittings3. Reinforced Concrete Pipe4. ADS Nyloplast (or equivalent) Drain Basins and Tops5. Contech (or equivalent) Slotted Drain and Grate 6. Trench Drain/Fountain Trench Drain and Grate

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Non-Standard Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, and covers.2. ADS Nyloplast (or equivalent) drain basins and tops: Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, frames, covers, and grates.3. Contech (or equivalent) Slotted Drain and Grate: Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, frames, covers, and grates.4. Trench Drain / Fountain Trench Drain: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames,

covers, and grates.



C. Certification, signed by material producer and contractor, that standard precast and cast in place concrete storm drainage structures comply with VDOT standards and specifications.

D. VDOT approved job mix for bedding stone.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from storm drainage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.

B. Record Drawings of installed storm system including manhole tops, curb inlets, trench drains, cleanouts, etc.



A. Do not store plastic basins, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

D. Handle catch basins according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.


A. Verify existing utilities to ensure that storm sewerage system piping may be installed in compliance with original design and referenced standards.

B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned.

C. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by The City or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify the City no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without the City’s written permission.

D. Existing utilities across or along the line of work are indicated only in an approximate location. Locate all underground lines and structures. Call “Miss Utility” prior to construction. If utilities are marked that are not shown on the plans, locate utility vertically and horizontally and provide information to City

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 GENERAL

A. All materials used for construction of the storm drainage system shall comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the Virginia Department of Transportation Road and Bridge Standards and Road and Bridge Specifications, and the City of Richmond Stormwater Management Design and Construction Standards Manual.

2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Gravity Sewer Piping:

1. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 679, T-1wall thickness, PVC gravity sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends and with integral ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals for gasketed joints.

2.3 HDPE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Materials per the manufacturer’s specifications.

2.4 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Reinforced concrete pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards and Specifications.

2.5 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Josam Company.b. MIFAB, Inc.c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.d. Tyler Pipe.e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.f. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Description: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug.

3. Top-Loading Classification(s): Heavy Duty.4. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe

and fittings.

2.6 DRAINS

A. ADS Nyloplast (or equivalent) drain basin and top per manufacturer’s specifications.

B. Contech (or equivalent) slotted drain and grate per manufacturer’s specifications.










C. Hendrick Architectural Products (or equivalent) trench drain grate per manufacturer’s specifications.

2.7 MANHOLES

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes and manhole frames and covers shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards and Specifications.

2.8 CONCRETE

A. General: Conform to the requirements of VDOT Standard Class A3 concrete unless otherwise indicated.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.


2.9 CATCH BASINS

A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards and Specifications:

2.10 STORMWATER INLETS

A. Curb Inlets and frames and grates shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards and Specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."

3.2 GENERAL

A. Install storm drainage system in accordance with the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards and Specifications.


A. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.



B. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow.2. Install piping as detailed on the Drawings3. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping in accordance with the latest edition of the VDOT

Road and Bridge Standards and Specifications.4. Install HDPE piping according to ASTM F 2619.


A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Join corrugated HDPE piping according to ASTM D 3212 for push-on joints.

2. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasketed joints.

3. Join reinforced concrete piping and fittings in accordance with the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards and Specifications.

4. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type flexible couplings.


A. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction as illustrated in the Drawings. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping.

B. In vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set top of cleanout flush with grade.

C. In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 PVC pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches deep. Set top of cleanout 1 inch above grade.

D. Comply with requirements for concrete specified in Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.6 DRAIN INSTALLATION

A. Install non-VDOT drains per manufacturer’s specifications.

B. Install type of drains in locations indicated on Drawings.

1. Use Light-Duty, top-loading classification drains in earth or unpaved foot-traffic areas.2. Use Medium-Duty, top-loading classification drains in paved foot-traffic areas.3. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification drains in vehicle-traffic service areas.4. Use Extra-Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification drains in roads.

C. Embed drains in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides.

D. Fasten grates to drains if indicated.

E. Set drain frames and covers with tops flush with pavement surface.



3.7 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. Install manholes and manhole frames and covers per the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards and Specifications.

1. Set manhole frames and covers to elevations indicted on Drawings.

3.8 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION

A. Install catch basins and frames and grates in accordance with the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards and Specifications.

B. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated on Drawings.

C. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated on Drawings.

3.9 STORMWATER INLET INSTALLATION

A. Install curb inlets in accordance with the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards and Specifications.

3.10 ADS NYLOPLAST DRAIN BASINS AND TOPS.

A. Install drain basin and tops to sizes and shapes indicated per manufacturer’s specifications.

B. Set tops to elevations indicated on drawings.


A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards and Specifications.

3.12 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.

1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.



3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 or larger, or to underground manholes and structures by cutting into existing unit and creating an opening large enough to allow 3 inches of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe, manhole, or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground.

a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.

b. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials.

4. Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.

5. Pipe couplings, expansion joints, and deflection fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

6. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping unless otherwise indicated.a. Shielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes.b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different OD.c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space

between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.7. Connect concrete pipes in accordance with the latest edition of the VDOT Road and

Bridge Standards.8. Connect HDPE and PVC pipes per manufacturer’s specifications.

3.13 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:

1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch- thick, brick masonry bulkheads.2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable

methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.

B. Abandoned Manholes and Structures: Excavate around manholes and structures as required and use one procedure below:

1. Remove manhole or structure and close open ends of remaining piping.2. Remove top of manhole or structure down to at least 36 inches below final grade. Fill to

within 12 inches of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete.

C. Backfill to grade according to Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."

3.14 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures.



1. Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

structures.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder

of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of the latest City Standards or

the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards and Specifications, whichever is more stringent.

3. Schedule tests and inspections with the City’s Department of Public Utilities Inspector with at least 24 hours' advance notice.

4. Submit separate report for each test.

C. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to the latest City standards or the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards and Specifications, whichever is more stringent.

1. Exception: Piping with soil tight joints unless required by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

E. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

3.16 CLEANING

A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed.

1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning.2. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of day or whenever work stops.3. Flush piping between manholes and drop inlets to remove collected debris. Flush pipes

through an approved erosion and sediment control measure.





SUBDRAINAGE; SECTION 33 46 00Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4Copyright 2016 TIMMONS GROUP

SECTION 33 46 00 - SUBDRAINAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Perforated-wall pipe and fittings.2. Underdrains


1. Section 334100 “Storm Utility Drainage Piping”


A. Product Data:

1. Underdrains, including rated capacities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings:1. NPS 6 and Smaller: ASTM F 405 or AASHTO M 252, Type CP; corrugated, for coupled

joints.2. NPS 8 and Larger: ASTM F 667; AASHTO M 252, Type CP; or AASHTO M 294,

Type CP; corrugated; for coupled joints.3. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type.

B. Perforated PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2729, bell-and-spigot ends, for loose joints.

2.2 UNDERDRAINS

A. Single-Pipe Drainage Conduits: Prefabricated geocomposite with perforated corrugated core molded from HDPE complying with ASTM D 3350 and wrapped in geotextile filter fabric.1. Pipe size per Drawings2. Filter Fabric: PP geotextile.3. Fittings: HDPE with combination NPS 4 and NPS 6 outlet connection.4. Couplings: Corrugated HDPE band.



2.3 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Soil materials are specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."

2.4 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS

A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range from 110 to 330 gpm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM D 4491.

B. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament.

1. Survivability: AASHTO M 288 Class 2.2. Styles: Flat and sock.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be installed.

B. Where subdrainage is required for landscaping, locate and mark existing utilities, underground structures, and aboveground obstructions before beginning installation and avoid disruption and damage of services.


3.2 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."

3.3 LANDSCAPING DRAINAGE INSTALLATION

A. Provide trench width to allow installation of drainage conduit. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required slope, and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system.

B. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.

C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches.

D. Install drainage conduits as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for landscaping subdrainage with horizontal distance of at least 6 inches between conduit and trench walls. Wrap drainage conduits without integral geotextile filter fabric with flat-style geotextile filter fabric before installation. Connect fabric sections with adhesive or tape.

E. Add drainage course to top of drainage conduits.

F. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage conduit to within 12 inches of finish grade.



G. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric.

H. Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at least 4 inches.

I. Fill to Grade: Place satisfactory soil fill material over drainage course. Place material in loose-depth layers not exceeding 6 inches. Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to finish grade.


A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions..1. Landscaping Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum

slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches () unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down.3. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing

upslope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell.

B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.

C. Install thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2321.


A. Join perforated HDPE pipe and fittings with couplings according to ASTM D 3212 with loose banded, coupled, or push-on joints.

B. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit materials and dimensions of both pipes.


A. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 33 41 00 "Storm Utility Drainage Piping."

B. Cleanouts for Landscaping Subdrainage:1. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at

changes in direction as illustrated in the Drawings. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping.

2. In vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, [18 by 18 by 12 inches] deep. Set top of cleanout flush with grade.

3. In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 PVC pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place

concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches () deep. Set top of cleanout 1 inch () above grade.

4. Comply with requirements for concrete specified in Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."



3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 33 41 00 "Storm Utility Drainage Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping. Comply with requirements for underground warning tapes specified in specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."

1. Install PE warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.2. Install detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

structures.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to ensure free flow before backfilling.

2. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory.

B. Drain piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.10 CLEANING

A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops.
